Home

Fostex D2424 DVR User Manual

1. e o ttt t ttt ttt MIDI IN MIDI sound sources Connecting external equipment Refer to connecting schematic 1 Connect the unit MIDI OUT to MIDI IN of the MIDI sequencer 2 Set the MIDI sequencer for external sync mode EXTERNAL SYNC by MIDI clock Refer to the Owners Manual of the equipment in use for details 75 FOStex Model D2424 Reference Manual MIDI Sync Function Setup of the recorder 1 Because the MIDI clock and song position pointer will be output from the recorder set the SETUP mode MIDI sync signal output setting to CLK nitial setting MTC Permissible setting CLK MIDI clock and song position pointer CLK MTC MIDI time code MTC Off No output of MIDI sync signal This item can be setup for each program The setting can be saved loaded as song data This setting will be held even though power is switched OFF Refer to page 113 SETUP mode MIDI sync signal output setting for correct operating procedures 2 The meter in the desired bar can be set by Time signature setting of the SETUP mode nitial setting 001 bar 4 4 signature Permissible bar setting 001 999 Permissible meter setting 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 1 8 3 8 5 8 6 8 7 8 8 8 Elimination of signature Permissible setting of maximum number of points 64 points This item can be set for ea
2. 70 Stonne the edit DOPDS era Ferunt etp emere tecto rP eas euet et e ETey arte docena eee ee ene Deva ee dev sauren Lens Festa sed deus bre De puer vua 70 Checking and adjusting the edit points 1 decedit ie ee ier eres as etate ttes eto tre tee eara o eod an e esee dod 71 Execulirng Erase eoi enr edi e e nin ina p E E e punk E etu seus ice A e e Rana ra iet cuan E eL dns 71 Sinpgleundo redo EBEaSe iu eieeeseiecie trente ved cel satus etae eu terree erbe pope aeger CEU ea al sire pde E EE Eee ee Pr VAR Ese 71 TACK EX CHANG Cs so e 72 Executing track exch nge 2 e ei aa aea aA aE sends adits sada EEEE EE ETRE E 72 Fegistering the Track rnalrie s coe dte e ec Ie elei uit lode est etd de esee n alesana aaee itae Eais 74 MIDI Sync Function MIDI clock Syne System epit ettet tec dae eret e note inedia e opener 75 Connecting external equipment 3 eric eisai ie Nova DERE ETE adeeb coL LES REESE 75 Setup ot therecorder as cer error tei Pria ries pe DO EET FP Eel eed dene EEEM REDE 76 Confirming the MIDI CLOCK SV iiie iter tinio e eret repone trita eyes Pede tease ave dev bb Feed va ote DU eee goa 76 EXC CUMS OF TECORGING DD 77 MTC sync MIDI machine control Syste Missas nran aasa ieda Ei E N 77 Setup to external equiptrient issoria aaea a a EE TEE a E e VES Fd rer Era aaRS 78 Setup f external equipment ioco erro eter trao ert te iniu teuer eie Un vo iv v
3. ssssssseseeeneereeeenneneene nennen enne 51 Storie UT CASS enne oe esti teret costed eve reo tecavebeesvataetaves esa Ce sve cere sdevt esaet EEE 51 Editing and Stored data rrr retrieve eerte e ro tasa eie et ees eme ce dove o ep Ea pee LE RAE Yn HEP eee IgE 51 storing and editing LOCATE Key 5 8 rtr rr ementi in UR rape ri tenebra deeds 52 Storing in realtime ciones ect Fia ea aed ha Besse seva Pues Dover ee vega aaaea ee eeu va Nae oae ed Dave Read 52 Editandrestoredata that is already StoFet 5 2 irit oraren eacee esie itida teia ratatet E ea 53 Locate Function Direct LoCale ota EE RE nat need Em eii rtt a tesi ite iu Ie EEEE Auto Play function sss Auto Return function Auto nz To zr BV In eje RENE 56 Chain Play Function Setup of the Chain Play List eesssesessesseeseee seen nette netten tnnt te tnen etant tnt e tete intra tn inen a ttn te tete enata tennis 58 Setup of the Chain Play Mode iieri irte dede Huet enero each aE E aTa eda e irn adea Ce des 59 Specify the Program and Excute Chain Play essen enne nennen enne nnne nnne 59 Cue amp Review Function Cue amp Review function using the REWIND and F FWD buttons essent 60 Cue amp Review function using the SHUTTLE dial essent nntnees 60 Digital scrubbing using the envelope FUNCTION ccceceeceeeeeteeseeeeeeeeeecaeeecse
4. Program 1 P01 Program 2 P02 Program 99 P99 85 Fostex Model D2424 Reference Manual Saving and Loading Song Data The following items can be saved and loaded as song data Memory data CLIPBOARD IN OUT AUTO RTN START END AUTO PUNCH IN OUT point data Locate data locate number 00 99 when saving and loading song data using SCSI Time Base ABS MTC or BAR BEAT CLK Setup mode Time signature setting BAR BEAT Tempo setting Click On Off setting Preroll Time setting Midi Sync Out setting MTC Frame Rate setting MTC Offset setting MTC Offset Mode setting Rec Protect On Off setting Slave Mode on off setting Slave Type setting Virtual TC Setting when saving and loading song data using SCSI The following items cannot be saved or loaded as song data Auto Play mode and Auto Return mode On Off Vari pitch mode On Off and pitch data Setup mode Digital In setting Digital Out setting Bar Beat Resolution On Off setting Device ID setting Foot switch function setting Mark stop function setting Auto EE mode setting Chain play mode setting and chain list Reference level setting Bal Unbal setting Contrast level setting Notes in using DAT and adat gt Execution of save load is permissible only in 44 1kHz 16 bit 44 1IKHz 24 bit 48kHz 16 bit or 48kHz 24 bit asynchronous recording in S P DIF format or with digital devices
5. O AUTO PLAY IN OUT START IN OUT END mm m E 8 3 8 E JJ t J C PREVIEW J CHARACTER gt EDIT SETUP UNDO REDO PREV NEXT CO CeO CeO CO Ge OD SHIFT key lt Display indication during the Preview operation gt Memory data 1 234567 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 During operation the meter display will light up from left to right gt gt gt D o o ee ee ee ee Approx 2sec 1 sec normal playback 1 sec mute playback The sound falls at the memory point The recorder repeats playback of the fall sound at the locate point edit point As shown in the diagram one second of data prior to the locate point is played back then muted fade out at the locate point The muted playback continues for one second The recorder will repeat this operation until you quit the Preview function Model D2424 Reference Manual Preview Function Fostex Executing the Preview function 1 Press the desired memory key while holding down the 2 Adjust the monitor sound of the selected track so that SHIFT key when the recorder is stopped it can be monitored on the mixer Pressing the desired memory key will enable you to preview the sound at the locate point edit point stored Note in the corresponding memory key If data stored in each memory key is in the initial state all memory keys will be in ABS time 00h 00m OOs M k In other words th
6. Track 1 Drum machine Recorder section To play the sound on an Additional track you need to move the data from the Additional track to a Real track Refer to Track Exchange function on page 72 for more information 28 Model D2424 Reference Manual Before Starting FOSt X Audio file and event lt About an audio file gt During recording the recorder consecutively records an independent audio file recorded area in each track of each Program However you can record data on the recorder at any point within 24 hours of ABS time and you can intentionally create silence between two audio files In this case a silent part is counted as a 0 file Therefore audio files and O files are consecutively created as shown in the diagram below The total number of these audio files and O files is called the number of events The maximum number of events is 512 per track tracks 1 24 After the number of events reaches 507 new data will not be recorded ABS 0 REC END Audio File 1 Audio File 2 0 File 1 Audio File 3 0 File 2 Audio File 4 Recorded part Silence Usually an event is created by one recording or edit The number of events increases or decreases depending on the number of edit points or the amount of disk free space The recorder disk management operates in such way that the number of events will decrease The number of events does not affect usual music production However if
7. Refer to the Display section on page 19 Fostex Model D2424 Reference Manual Names and Functions Rear panel section 5 1 Analog Input jack connector PHONE External analog audio signals to the D2424 are input here These are connected for example to external mixer s group out BUSS OUT connectors As signals applied to INPUT 1 8 are simultaneously sent to tracks 1 8 9 16 and 17 24 tracks for recording must be selected via the RECORD TRACK select key Note Analog input output can be switched for balance unbalance via the SETUP mode At initial setup it is set for unbalance 2 Analog Output jack connector PHONE Analog audio signals Channels 1 24 from D2424 are output here For example this is connected to the external mixer TAPE IN connector Note When using a current drive formatted to 96kHz 24 bits or 88 2kHz 24 bits only OUTPUT 1 8 will be functional 3 REMOTE INPUT connector External RS 422 control signal SONY 9PIN PROTOCOL or Fostex System Exclusive Message is input here to control this recorder 4 REMOTE INPUT terminating switch This REMOTE INPUT terminating switch 1000 is switched ON for normal use of an inputted RS 422 control signal into the REMOTE INPUT connector When controlling a multiple number of recorders the last one only is switched ON the others are switched OFF
8. f you have selected each Program that requires only one disk to save Flashing 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 If you have selected all Programs Flashing SH a WO rs TODS as CLOCK INT i Seawed 2 38 24 30 32 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 If all programs can be saved in one disk same numbers such as 03 03 will be shown in However if it displays for example 02 04 it means only 2 from among the 4 programs can be saved in the backup disk f you have selected each Program that requires multiple disks The following indication for example appears is the tentative title the program number flashes the information on the size of the program and number of disks necessary alternate This display indicates that one SCSI hard disk is not enough to save the program chosen and that several disks are necessary to proceed with the save procedure In the following example you see a 2D indication as the number of disks necessary This indicates that 2 disks are necessary to execute the save procedure Flashing 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 FOStex Model D2424 Reference Manual Saving and Loading Song Data 5 Press the EXECUTE YES key The recorder performs the save operation differently depending on the selected Program a When selec
9. r a A svs 1 While the recorder is stopped press the SETUP 4 Press the EXECUTE YES key key to enter SETUP mode The selected operating clock will register and in step 2 above will flashes 2 Turn the JOG dial to select Clock Sel Refer to the chart of next page in regards to Digital flashes then press the EXECUTE YES key input setting and Operating clock setting A flashing will extinguish by pressing the EXECUTE YES key and the operating clock information that was To cancel the operation or to restore the setting lit will being flashing Initial setting it will show Int obtained prior to the EXECUTE YES key press press the STOP button or the EXIT NO key Each time e you press one of these keys the recorder returns to i uBDOS the previous hierarchy level of the menu and finally i exits SETUP mode and displays the previous Time Base 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 222324 Flashing 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2223 24 3 With the JOG dial select the operating clock If Int initial setting is selected the recorder will operate using the internal clock If Auto is selected the recorder will sync to an external digital signal If Word is selected the recorder will sync to an external word clock signal 121 Fostex
10. 8288 466 000 Heference Manual 24 Track Digital Recorder Model e e t 24TRACK DIGITAL RECORDERL E2 AA E Introduction Thank you for purchasing the Fostex D2424 The D2424 is a digital recorder using a 3 5 inch E IDE hard disk recording media for recording playback editing in 24 real tracks plus 32 additional tracks In addition to non compression recording at quantization 16 bit 44 1kHz or 48kHz 24 bit 44 1kHz or 48kHz 24 bit 88 2kHz or 96kHz the D2424 is also equipped with adat input output by switch ing from S P DIF Besides analog simultaneous record playback because it also complies with digital recording S P DIF or adat using DATA input output and simultaneous recording of analog input plus digital input S P DIF or adat a full digital recording system can be built by combining the D2424 with various digital mixers In regards to save load of song data in addition to using adat digital signals and S P DIF digital signals high speed backup of FDMS 3 Ver 3 0 WAV file through the standard feature SCSI connec tor is also possible Furthermore by installing an optional Model 9044 BAY CADDY an E IDE hard disk for backup or the optional Model 9046 DVD RAM drive can be installed enabling high speed backup of FDMS 3 Ver 3 0 WAV files For optional units Model 8345 TC SYNC card and the Model 8350 AES EBU card are available and these will also comply to phasing of the standard feature WORD clock a
11. flashes then press the EXECUTE YES key The currently selected MIDI sync signal type appears on the display Press the EXECUTE YES key to turn off the flashing indication The MIDI sync signal type indication flashes and the indicator flashes indicating the SYNC OUT setting The initial setting is MTC as shown below oL OL BiT 24 UDM Fs AOI Los CLOCK INT 12 3 45 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Flashing OL BiT 24 UDM Fs ID has clock INT 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 3 Turn the JOG dial to select the desired MIDI sync signal Setting this parameter to CLK will select MIDI clock amp Song Position Pointer Setting the parameter to MTC initial setting will select MIDI time code With the Off setting no MIDI sync signal will be output 4 Press the EXECUTE YES key The selected MIDI sync signal type is stored and the recorder returns to the display with the flashing indicator as shown in step 2 To cancel the setting operation or to restore a setting obtained prior to the EXECUTE YES key press press the STOP button or the EXIT NO key Each time you press one of these keys the recorder returns to the previous hierarchy level of the menu and finally exits SETUP mode and displays the previous Time Base Setting an MTC frame rate Frame Rate menu The Setting an MTC
12. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 ko 14 02 fs ka 15 fe 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 These will light when locked to digital in and for the track set to digital in will light up This indication lights up when the recorder MIDI receives effective MIDI message from an external MIDI device SAVE When the recorder enters save function mode the selected parameter name will appear here When the recorder enters load function mode LOAD the selected parameter name will appear here This lights when a digital input track is set and a DIGITAL digital signal is correctly input It will blink if the digital signal is not correctly input COMPLETED This message indicates that an operation such as copy move and paste has been completed This lights up when the D2424 is operating INT using the internal clock EXT This lights up when the D2424 is operating in sync with an external sync signal This lights up together with display of EXT WORD when the D2424 is in sync with an external word signal This lights up together with display of EXT VIDEO when the D2424 is in sync with an external video signal Note When D2424 is not in sync with external sync signals word video and digital IN signals EXT WORD VIDEO or DIGITAL display will blink If this display is blinks inspect the connectors and cables between external digital equipment and check that sync signals or digi
13. If the external device does not accept the digital signal or if you notice digital noise check the connection cabling and the settings of the recorder and the external device Refer to the instruction manuals that came with any external digital device for details Executing the save operation Use the Save PGM menu in Setup mode e Output format available adat SPDIF SCSI IDE2 Programs available When using an adat SPDIF gt PO1 P99 each program individually When using a SCSI IDE2 gt PO1 P99 or All program e Track available When using an adat or DAT Tracks 1 8 1 16 1 24 1 32 1 40 1 48 1 56 9 16 9 24 9 32 9 40 9 48 9 56 17 24 17 32 17 40 17 48 17 56 25 32 25 40 25 48 25 56 33 40 33 48 33 56 41 48 or 49 56 When using a SCSI IDE2 gt All tracks 1 56 will be automatically selected 87 FOStex Model D2424 Reference Manual Saving and Loading Song Data 1 Press the SETUP key The recorder enters Setup mode 2 Use the JOG dial to select Save PGM and then press the EXECUTE YES key The message Save Device and an indication of the digital signal to be saved SPDIF adat SCSI or IDE2 will flash on the display BIT 24 UOM Fs J80 CLOCK INT oL o 3 H 9 12 18 24 30 42 i BIT 24 UOM Fs pimin CLOCK INT 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 3 Rotate the JOG di
14. This part is changed All tracks are in playback monitoring mode All tracks are in playback monitoring mode Only track 3 in input monitoring and data will be recorded The RECORD button lamp flashes J The recorder enters recording mode at the Punch In point and cancels recording mode at the Punch Out point Press the foot switch at the Punch Out point Press the foot switch at the Punch In point 4 Press the STOP button 5 Play track 3 and check the result of Punch In Out Caution after Punch Out At Take of punch out the punch in recording track will not immediately enter the repro monitor mode from the input monitor mode enter the repro monitor mode about two seconds after mute playback This is a functional feature of the recorder and not a malfunction 43 another take unless you stop the recorder first Procedure 1 Press the PLAY button to start playback from a point slightly before the Punch In point 2 Press the RECORD button while holding down the PLAY button at the desired Punch In point Punch In recording starts 3 Press the PLAY button at the desired Punch Out point Recording is punched out f you press only the RECORD button in both steps 2 and 3 you can rehearse Punch In Out Single Undo Redo You can single undo or redo Manual Punch In Out recording Press the UNDO REDO key after recording is
15. 18 5 REMOTE THRU connector RS 422 control signal SONY 9PIN PROTOCOL or Fostex System Exclusive Message input from the REMOTE INPUT connector is output here This is connected to the second recorder REMOTE INPUT when controlling a multiple number of recorders 6 AC IN connector The power cable packaged with this recorder is connected here Note Always plug the power cable to the recorder before plugging the cable into the wall outlet 7 Optional Panel The additional installation panel for the optional Model 8345 TC SYNC card x1 or Model 8350 AES EBU card x 1 Normally it can be used with the panel remained installed e For functions at installation of the optional Model 8345 please refer to References on the last page of this manual Note Installation of the option must be done by our Fostex Service Station For details please inquire at your nearest Fostex Service Station 8 SCSI connector SCSI connector half pitch 50 pin Connect a backup SCSI device to SAVE LOAD data Up to one SCSI devices can be connected to the SCSI connector Refer to page 91 for more details on SAVE LOAD using a SCSI device Model D2424 Reference Manual Names and Functions FOSt X 9 WORD INPUT connector Connector BNC Word clock signal from external digital equipment is input here for the purpose of phasing with external digital equipment 10 WORD OUTPUT connector Co
16. Initialize the recorder Confirm the program Set all three recorder s to the same sampling frequency Master 1 Clock Sel Int MIDI OUT Y WORD IN MIDI IN Slave 2 Clock Sel Word MIDI THRU MIDI IN Slave lt 3 gt Clock Sel Word Equipment interconnections O IE a a a SE ae 1 From the recorder 1 to the recorder 2 connect WORD OUT to WORD IN and MIDI OUT to MIDI IN 2 From the recorder 1 to the recorder 3 connect WORD OUT to WORD IN 3 From the recorder 2 to the recorder 3 connect MIDI THRU Note to MIDI IN lt Notes gt In order to slave drive the recorder with each other the best setting is to supply word clock signals together with MTC from the master As shown in the above schematic at input or the Word Clock from the master to the second slave WORD OUT from the master must always be branched to the second slave Do not connect the first slave WORD OUT to the second slave WORD IN Setup of the recorder 1 Master 1 Because MTC which is the reference for sync is output from the recorder 1 set the MIDI sync signal output setting of the SETUP mode to MTC Refer to page 113 SETUP mode MIDI sync signal output setting for operating procedure and details 2 A random frame rate to be used is set by the SETUP mode MTC Frame rate setting Refer to page 113 SETUP mode MTC Frame rate setting
17. Setting the Record Protect function Rec Protect menu The recorder features the Record Protect function which is similar to the function of record protect tabs on cassette tapes The Setting the Record Protect function menu allows you to turn the Record Protect function on and off When this function is turned on you cannot record paste or erase data Use this function to protect your precious data from being erased accidentally Initial setting Off e Option Off or On You can turn the function on and off for each Program individually The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the song data The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the recorder The Program is automatically checked before the operation 116 Model D2424 Reference Manual Changing the Initial Settings SETUP mode FOStex Recording enabled disabled 1 While the recorder is stopped press the SETUP 3 Use the JOG dial to enable or disable recording key to enter SETUP mode Rotating the JOG dial clockwise and counter clockwise will flash On and Off alternately Selecting Off enables recording you can record paste 2 Turn the JOG dial to select Rec Protect and erase data flashes then press the EXECUTE YES key Selecting On disables recording and you cannot The current setting appears on the display record paste or erase data Pressing the
18. lock enable command The command for setting slave mode on off setup menu of D2424 12 42 lock mode lock mode command The command for setup of the slave mode setup menu when this equipment is set to slave mode on 12 45 count mmc track copy clip command When this command is received D2424 will copy multiple number of tracks can be copied simultaneously the sound data as data for copy paste from the pre registered clipboard in point to the clipboard out point in the track specified by lt mmc track With completion of copying the data into the clipboard D2424 will immediately reply with 32 45 edit message 01 com pleted gt If copy cannot be executed due to improper fig ures of the pre registered clipboard in clipboard out points or incorrect track section the corresponding edit message will be returned 12 46 lt count 01 gt lt repeat count copy paste command 12 46 count repeat count gt lt mmc track copy paste com mand When this command is received D824 D1624 will paste the sound data which has been copied into the clipboard on the same track from the pre registered auto punch in point as the starting point for the number of time specified by repeat count However if the sound data length in the clipboard is less than 10ms the specifying the repeat count will be limited to 01 Also by specifying mmc track paste can be executed on other tracks i
19. 71 Indicates on 72 Indicates off hr mn sc fr ff st complies to the MMC standard time code 70 default 71 20n 72 off 01 7F Especially when executing commands such as paste the number of pasting times to be continuously repeated following the auto punch in point is specified 00 56 7F Select recorder tracks 1 56 00 in particular is not specified default setting 7F indicates input output of Adat optical For details refer to explanation on setting the Command Mode 00 lock disable chase disable 01 lock enable chase enable Corresponds to SLAVE ON 01 OFF 00 in the main unit 00 lock disable chase disable 01 lock enable unlocked chase enable unlocked 11 lock enable locked chase enable locked O1 7F Indicates program numbers P1 P99 on the main unit However D2424 can specify only 01 corresponds to P01 63H corresponds to P99 40 Free 42 Vari Indicates the slave mode when this equipment is set to slave ON 136 Model D2424 Reference Manual MIDI Implementation Chart MMC List FOstex bar2 bar1 bar0 sign sigd bar2 The 100th digit of the bar figure is expressed in BCD bar1 The 10th digit of the bar figure is expressed in BCD bar0 The 1 digit of the bar figure is expressed in BCD sign Numerator of the signature to be set is expressed in BCD sigd Denominator of the signature to be set is expressed in BCD
20. F FWD button Locate REC END 3 Pressing the STOP button will abort the editing operations and display the current position of the recorder if you wish to quit the data edit mode cancel the recall or store operation quit the pitch data display cancel the edit operation such as pasting or cancel the SETUP menu settings Pressing the foot switch while holding down this button allows you to turn the punch in out rehearsal mode ON OFF 1 Clipboard playback The recorder plays back the copy data or move data for the Clipboard During audio playback of the copy or move data the FL will display the time length and data type Copy Clip Play or Move Clip Play and the copy or move source track indicator will flash enabling you to quickly determine the track and data type Fostex Model D2424 Reference Manual Names and Functions 2 Locate ABS 0 The recorder will locate the top of the selected Program ABS TIME 00m 00s OOf 3 Locate REC END The recorder will locate the end of the recorded data on the Program ABS REC END These operations can be executed only on real tracks Refer to page 24 of the Before Starting section for more information about ABS 0 and ABS END Refer to page 42 for more information about Punch In Out recording using the foot switch Refer to page 67 on details for Clip board play Refer to page 54 on details for LOCATE
21. The current setting Off or On appears on the 4 Press the EXECUTE YES key The display shows the selection On or Off then returns display dpa edet Pressing the EXECUTE YES key lights up the flashing to the indication in step 2 character steadily the current setting flashes The initial setting is Off as shown below To cancel the setting operation or to exit SETUP mode after storing data press the STOP button or the EXIT NO key Each time you press one of these keys the 5 recorder returns to the previous hierarchy level of the 4805 menu and finally exits SETUP mode CLOCK INT m E 2 E 12 3 45 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 111 Fostex Model D2424 Reference Manual Changing the Initial Settings SETUP mode Setting a preroll value Preroll Time menu The recorder features the Preroll function that enables you to locate a position a few seconds prior to a specified locate point The Setting a preroll value menu allows you to set the preroll time in seconds The Preroll function is convenient when you wish to monitor the audio data from a point slightly before the locate point Initial setting 00 second e Setting range of preroll time 00 10 seconds in one second steps You can set the value for each Program individually The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the song data The settings are maintained af
22. 2 Turn the JOG dial to select NOs Event flashes and then press the EXECUTE YES key The screen changes as follows indicating the number of events on track 1 In this example track 1 includes five events HBUS CLOCK INT 1 2345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 The number of events on track 1 127 Model D2424 Reference Manual Changing the Initial Settings SETUP mode FOStex 3 Use the JOG dial to select another 01 24 to check To cancel the operation Or to restore the setting the number of events on the corresponding track obtained prior to the EXECUTE YES key press press the STOP button or the EXIT NO key Each time you press one of these keys the recorder returns to the 4 Press the EXIT NO key or the STOP button previous hierarchy level of the menu and finally exits repeatedly to exit SETUP mode SETUP mode and displays the previous Time Base For more information on audio files and events refer to the Audio file and event section of the Before Starting chapter Setup of the Auto EE mode Auto EE Mode menu At the Setup of Auto EE mode menu you must set up whether it should be automatically set to ALL INPUT monitor or not when D2424 is in the STOP mode nitial setting Off e Device ID Off or On This setting is shared by all Programs in the same disk The settings cannot be saved and loaded as part of the song
23. F7 Example 2 Locate memory is recalled using the read command FO 7F device ID 06 read 42 count GP3 08 mmc time F7 Example 3 On the fly registering in the punch in memory using the move command FO 7F device ID 06 move 4C count destination OC GP4 gt source selected time code 01 F7 Example 4 When 1 frame is to be set in the punch in memory using the add command Time figure to be added is pre registered in GP7 Set 00h 00m 00s O1f in GP7 FO 7F device ID 06 add 4D count destination OC GP4 gt source 1 01 GP4 source 2 OF GP7 F7 Example 5 When 1 frame is to be set in the punch in memory using the subtract command Time figure to be subtracted is pre registered in GP7 Set 00h 00m 00s O1f in GP7 FO 7F device ID 06 substract 4E count destination OC GP4 gt lt source 1 OC GP4 gt source 2 OF GP7 gt F7 135 Fostex Model D2424 Reference Manual MIDI Implementation Chart MMC List Data Type 12 stop Indicates the next operating mode following locating to the start point GP3 upon arriving at the end point GP6 by the play mode In D2424 12 stop only is effective 12 stop 15 play Specifies operating mode in which D2424 should enter upon completing the locate operation Corresponds to the setting of AUTO PLAY ON 15 OFF 12 on the main unit O01 7F Specifies succee
24. Sony 9pin protocol ES buss RS 422 THRU Connector D sub 9pin Output Direct output of RS 422 MIDI In Out Thru Connector DIN 5pin Punch In Out Connector 6mm dia phone jack optional model 8051 SCSI Port for backup Connector D sub 50pin half pitch Physical Dimensions 482 W x 141 H x 381 D mm Weight 7 0kg included remote controller 120VAC 60Hz 230V 50 60Hz Power Consumption 60W Power Requirement Specifications and appearance are subject to change without notice for product improvement Adat and the adati symbol are trademarks of Alesis Corporation FDMS 3 Fostex Disk Management System 3 Ver 3 FDIO 1 Ver 2 Fostex Data In Out 1 Ver 2 Memo Declaration of EC Directive This equipment is compatible with the EMC Directive 89 336 EEC Directive on approximation of member nation s ordinance concerning the electromagnetic compatibility and with the Low Voltage Directive 73 23 EEC Directive on approximation of member nation s ordinance concerning electric equipment designed to be used within the specified voltage range The Affect of Immunity on This Equipment The affect of the European Specification EN50082 1 coexistence of electromagnetic waves common immunity specification on this equipment are as shown below In the electrical fast transient burst requirements radiate electromagnetic field requirements and static electricity discharging env
25. Store the data by specifying Locate Number to locate the intended time data Note that the LOCATE key always stores the last located time data in real time This Locate Number is stored as 00 and does not require a Locate Number specification to locate it Simply pressing the LOCATE key directly will locate that data This becomes an advantage since it is possible to repeatedly locate the last located point You can edit the data stored in the LOCATE key as so with the data stored in the Memory key For more details refer to page 52 You can store locate points for each Program You need to select a Program first When executing save load of song data via SCSI these data can be directly saved loaded Save load by DAT and adat cannot be done All locate points stored in the memory keys will be maintained after you turn off the recorder 50 Model D2424 Reference Manual Storing a Locate Point Edit Point FOSt X Storing and editing the locate points to the memory keys Base other ABS e Select the desired Time Base using the DISP SEL key and SHIFT key an if you wish to use a Time e The stored or edited locate points are used only in the currently selected Program Storing in real time You can store the locate point in the ABS MTC or BAR BEAT CLK Time Base in real time while the 3 2 recorder is playing 1 Press the PLAY button to play back data 2 When the point you wi
26. When this command is received D2424 will playback once from the head of the sound data copied in the clipboard by the copy clip and move clip commands Immediately after receiving the command D2424 will reply with 32 49 edit message 02 active count mmc track gt The sound data track number is indicated by mmc track Upon completion of playback 32 49 edit message 01 com pleted is sent and clipboard play is ended If there is no sound data in the clipboard 32 49 edit message 14 void data will be sent and clipboard play operation will be interrupted 12 4A undo command Upon receiving this command D2424 will revert to the condi tion prior to editing copy paste erase move paste cut redo operation With completion of undo operation D2424 will reply with 32 4A edit message 01 completed gt If D2424 is not possible to undo 32 4A edit message 00 no message gt will be replied 12 4B redo command When this command is received D2424 will return to the con dition prior to undo operation With completion of redo operation D2424 will reply with 32 4B edit message 01 completed If D2424 is not possible to redo 32 4B edit message 00 no message will be replied 12 4D count mmc track move clip command When this command is received D2424 will copy multiple tracks can be copied simultaneously the sound data from the pre registered clipboard in point t
27. flash menu Flashing fri uc Pan won Ho SEES CLOCK INTS 2 3 4 5 6 7 B 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 3 Press the EXECUTE YES key The currently selected Program title appears with the left most character flashing Flashing n fe zur yg 4 3 nn OBOS H j 5 H H CLOCK A 24 INT 30 30 Bong 32 32 1 2345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 4 Move the flashing cursor with the SHUTTLE dial and input the letter or number with the JOG dial NEXT key PREV key Up to 16 digits and the following letters numbers symbols can be input 5 After you enter the title press the EXECUTE YES key The new title is confirmed and the ABS time value of the Program appears 6 Press the EXIT NO key or the STOP button Model D2424 Reference Manual Punch In Out FOStex Punch In Out Punch In Out recording enables you to record over previously recorded parts See the diagram below For example using the Punch In Out function allows you to change an unsatisfactory guitar solo The D824 D1624 offers two types of Punch In Out functions One is called Auto Punch In Out in which you automatically re record a specified part The other is called Manual Punch In Out in which you record data manually using your foot to operate an optional foot switch model 8051 Both functions feature Rehearsal mode to enable you to practice
28. key will switch the Time Base as follows The Time Base can be set when the display shows the recorder s current position or the available disk space REMAIN ABS time base L Bar beat clk time base MTC time base Time Base The recorder uses time display ABS or MTC or Bar Beat Clock display to indicate the current position of the recorder section These displays are called Time Base ABS Absolute Time shows the absolute time of the disk and MTC MIDI Time code shows the relative time obtained by adding an MTC offset value to the ABS value Bar Beat Clock BAR BEAT CLK indicates a position within a piece of music and conforms to the MIDI clock and Song Position Pointers created on the internal Tempo Map Refer to pages 24 and 105 for more information about MTC and the internal Tempo Map 13 12 Program select key PGM SEL This key has the following two functions depending on the setup condition of Chain Play MD Setup of the Chain Play Mode in the SETUP mode lt When the Chain Play menu is set to Off gt The D2424 will switch to setup of a new program and the program select execution mode when this key is pressed Refer to page 37 for program select function lt When the Chain Play menu is set to other than Off gt You can specify the program at executing chain play when this key is pressed Refer to page
29. lock mode status request The command for inquiring the lock mode setup status and this is replied with 32 42 lock mode gt 22 45 copy clip status request The command inquiring the clipboard condition If there is a copy paste data in the clipboard D2424 will reply with 32 45 edit message O1 gt If data in the clipboard is for move paste or there is no valid data in it it will reply will 32 45 edit message 14 void data 22 46 copy paste status request The command inquiring execution status of copy paste edit ing When this command is received D2424 will reply with 140 either 32 46 edit message 02 mmc time or 32 46 edit message 00 gt mmc time indicates unprocessed time un til completion 22 47 erase status request The command inquiring execution status of erase When this command is received D2424 will reply by either 32 47 edit message 02 mmc time gt or 32 47 edit message 00 mmc time indicates unprocessed time un til completion 22 4D move clip status request The command inquiring the clipboard status If there is a move paste data on the clipboard D2424 will reply with 32 4D edit message 01 gt If data in the clipboard is for copy paste or there is no valid data on it 32 4D edit message 14 void data gt will be replied 22 4E move paste status request The command inquiring the move paste execution status When this command is
30. resolution status 23 46 33 46 on off midi sync out status23 47 33 47 midi sync MTC offset mode status 23 48 33 48 lt MTC offset mode gt vari pitch status 23 49 33 49 lt count 3 gt lt on off gt lt vari pitch signature map 24 Ol event number 34 01 signature map tempo set map 24 O2 event number 34 02 tempo set map preroll time 24 04 34 04 mmc time remain time 24 05 34 05 mmc time frame rate status 24 06 34 06 lt frame rate gt time base status 24 08 34 08 time base Note 2 There is a limitation on specifying the channel channel setting For details refer to Explanation on Command Mode Set mentioned in later pages 134 Model D2424 Reference Manual MIDI Implementation Chart MMC List FOSt X Allocation of GPO GP7 Edit point memory of this equipment is alloted to the response information field of 08 0F GPO GP7 as shown below GP7 however will be used as the work memory for small adjusting of the registered figure Refer to Examples 4 and 5 Response Information Field 08 GPO locate memory 09 GP1 clipboard in memory OA GP2 clipboard out memory OB GP3 start memory OC GP4 auto punch in memory OD GP5 auto punch out memory OE GP6 end memory OF GP7 reserved Example 1 mmc time gt is registered in the start memory using the write command FO 7F device ID 06 write 40 gt count GP3 OB mmc time
31. 2 Turn the JOG dial to select Drive Info flashes and then press the EXECUTE YES key First the manufacturer model of the currently installed hard disk will scroll and displayed OL Bm E H UOM ss JOLhe H clock INT 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 3 As the JOG dial is rotated information is displayed one after the other See display examples 127 This indicates that the formatting method is standard In addition to Standard formatting method Quick or Erase will be displayed 9 BT 24 UDM Fs dO Las CLOCK INT 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 The last date in when it was formatted in standard will be displayed The disk formatted by Quick will be displayed as gt 23 oer 2 UDM Fs giman CLoCK INT 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 This indicates that the format type was linear In addition to Linear the display can also show Backup LP ADAC or Illegal FM pr ET a JOT Fs ES E CLOCK INT 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Fostex Model D2424 Reference Manual Changing the Initial Setting SETUP mode This indicates that simultaneous recordable This indicates that the specific capacity of this number of tracks is
32. ABS Offset mode option ABS or Bar J You can set the mode for each Program individually The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the song data The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the recorder Setting MTC Offset mode 1 While the recorder is stopped press the SETUP 3 Use the JOG dial to select the desired Offset key to enter SETUP mode mode Rotating the JOG dial clockwise or counter clockwise Q an will alternately show a flashing ABS and Bar J 2 Turn the JOG dial to select Offset Mode 7 If you select ABS the specified MTC offset time is output flashes then press the EXECUTE YES key at ABS 00h 00m 00s OOf The current offset mode appears on the display If you select Bar the specified MTC offset time is Pressing the EXECUTE YES key to turn off the flashing output at 001bar 1beat OOclk of the Tempo Map 2 character The Offset mode indicator flashes With the initial setting ABS flashes as shown below 4 Press the EXECUTE YES key The selected offset mode is stored and the display returns to the indication with flashing i J480 IT To cancel the operation or to restore the setting obtained prior to the EXECUTE YES key press press the STOP button or the EXIT NO key Each time you press one of these keys the recorder returns to Flashing the previous hierarchy level of the menu and finally e
33. EXECUTE YES key turns off the flashing 2 character and the recording enabled disabled lt Note gt indicator flashes With the initial setting Off flashes When recording is disabled On and you try to record as shown below paste or erase data the recorder displays Protected for a second indicating that you cannot perform the operation To perform the operation you need to enable recording Off z Ei Li ot o 3 H E uil I BELEK ovog 4 Press the EXECUTE YES key Flashing To cancel the operation or to restore the setting obtained prior to the EXECUTE YES key press press the STOP button or the EXIT NO key Each time you press one of these keys the recorder returns to Ew E the previous hierarchy level of the menu and finally UDOM Fs Owe exits SETUP mode and displays the previous Time Base 200d 2 18 24 30 a2 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Setting digital input D in menu In the Setting a digital input menu the signal to be input to the DATA INPUT connector of the recorder can be set for either digital signals adat digital signal or S P DIF digital signal or analog signals and also setup of the digital in clock synchronous or asynchronous By using this function signals from external digital equipment CD MD DAT adat digital mixer can be digitally recorded When selecting the clock there are the A
34. NT 2 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 S Model D2424 Reference Manual Saving and Loading Song Data FOStex 4 Select the program to load with the JOG dial Then 5 Select the load destination program Then press the press the EXECUTE YES key EXECUTE YES key The menu to select the load destination current drive Start loading to the load destination program that you program appears selected Then New PGM appears so you can create a new COMPLETED lights up after successfully loading and program in the default setting the mode escapes from the SETUP mode Flashing Flashing OAc I i p qm a 3 UOM es OH m LN I s 2 i E 5 clock 30 30 ane 2 2 123 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2223 24 6 Press the EXIT NO or STOP key to turn OFF the If the current program is selected as the load COMPLETED message destination then dEL appears which refers to deleting that program This means the current data will be overwritten when loaded 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 SAVE LOAD by WAV file In addition to save load by the aforementioned FDMS 3 Fostex Disk Management System 3 save load to a DOS formatted disc by using WAV RIFF WAVE file format hereafter called WAV file is possible In the same way as the aforementioned Save Load by FDMS 3 it is possible not only to save data fr
35. The flashing Erase message lights up steadily and SURE flashes Flashing a E 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2223 24 Lit e To cancel the erase operation press the STOP button or the EXIT NO key while SURE flashes on the display 4 Press the EXECUTE YES key again The recorder starts erasing the data and Wait Erasing flashes When the erase operation is completed COMPLETED lights up 5 Press the STOP button or the EXIT NO key The recorder exits edit mode and displays the previous Time Base indication 71 lt Check Points gt To erase the data in its entirety from the tracks you can also use the Program Delete function to erase the entire Program In either case you can expand the recordable area on the disk Use either one of the erase operations to erase unnecessary data if the recorder displays an alarm message indicating insufficient recordable space for Auto Punch In Out Copy amp Paste or Move amp Paste To erase the data in its entirety from ABS 0 REC END it is recommended that erase end point AUTO PUNCH OUT point is stored after the REC END time to ensure through erase performance To do this move the recorder section location to the REC END point prior to storing the AUTO PUNCH OUT point press the PLAY button from that location move the ABS time after the REC END and store The hard disk will no
36. attached with a minus symbol Vari pitch must be specified at 0 1 when MSB q 0 Example 0000000000001 and at 0 196 when MSB q 1 Example 1111111111111 00 30nd 01 29 97nd 02 29 97df 03 25 04 24 05 30df Corresponds to selecting FRAME RATE of the SETUP menu 00 ABS O1 signature Corresponds to selecting MTC OFFSET MODE of the SETUP menu 00 ABS 01 BAR BEAT 02 MTC Corresponds to selecting TIME BASE SEL of the SETUP menu tL 12 tn n Indicates the track number tn Indicates absolute 8 bits of the Audio 16 bit data Range 00 7F 137 Fostex Model D2424 Reference Manual MIDI Implementation Chart MMC List Explanation on the Command Mode Set 12 22 lt on off gt loop on off command The command for setting the loop mode on off ON OFF of AUTO RTN of D2424 Default figure of the loop operation mode is 12 stop and this cannot be changed 12 28 post locate mode post locate command The command for setting the post locate mode ON OFF of AUTO PLAY of D2424 It will stop after locating if post locate mode 12 It will enter play after locating if post locate mode 15 12 2D lt on off gt auto rec command The command for setting auto rec mode on off ON OFF of AUTO PUNCH 0f D2424 Upon receiving this command D2424 will immediately reply the operating condition by sending 32 2D edit message 12 41 lock enable
37. channel within 1 8 or 9 16 or 17 24 can be selected 13 42 lt channel 7F gt lt channel 0 gt Adat out select command In a device which can be switched between SPDIF and Adat if the first display is lt channel 7F gt then Adat Out can be setup 13 43 lt program gt program change command The command for PROGRAM CHANGE of D2424 The present program number can be changed to the figure indicated by program 13 44 lt on off gt click on off command The command for setting the metronome on off of D2424 When ON is set the metronome signal will be fed to the track 24 output of D2424 13 46 lt on off gt Bar Beat Resolution ON OFF command The command for ON OFF of the bar beat resolution function of this equipments current program 13 47 midi sync Midi Sync Out command The setup command for MIDI Sync Out mode of this equip ments current program 13 48 MTC offset mode MTC offset mode command The setup command for MTC offset mode of this equipment s current program 13 49 lt count 3 gt lt on off gt vari data gt Vari pitch command 13 49 lt count 1 gt lt on off gt Vari pitch command The command for setting this equipments vari pitch ON OFF and pitch data Control of ON OFF only is possible at count 1 and both ON OFF and pitch data can be set at lt count 3 gt 14 01 signature map Signature set command The command for setting the meter of this equipment If
38. dial J appears for the bars and beats for which no tempo has been set 109 Fostex Model D2424 Reference Manual Changing the Initial Settings SETUP mode 5 Press the EXECUTE YES key Tempo Map The display shows the stored bar beat tempo then Time signature setting Tempo setting returns to the Tempo Edit indication as shown in step 001 bar 4 4 J 001 bar 1 4 22 120 003 bar 1 J 2 90 6 Repeat steps 3 5 to store necessary tempo data 005 bar 3 4 J 005 bar 3 J 60 For example if you specify tempo values in the song 007 bare J J 120 with OOlbar 4 42 and OOSbar 3 44 settings the Tempo Map includes the settings shown in the table below Mc oog ji a Tempo 120 Tempo 90 3 I N N ole i322 o Tempo 60 Tempo 120 Modifying or deleting stored tempo settings 1 Repeat steps 1 3 described in the Storing a tempo 4 Use the JOG dial to enter a new value value section Entering deletes the data at the selected bar beat 2 Turn the JOG dial to select bar beat to edit or 5 Press the EXECUTE YES key delete 6 Press the STOP button or the EXIT NO key 3 Turn the SHUTTLE dial so that the flashing cursor repeatedly to exit SETUP mode is on the TEMPO number 110 Model D2424 Reference Manual Changing the Initial Sett
39. edit point data will be stored in the corresponding memory key 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 63 FOStex Model D2424 Reference Manual Multiple Undo Function Multiple Undo Function To undo recordings or edits you can use the Multiple Undo Time Jump function explained in this section as well as the Single Undo Redo function explained in the Quick Operation Guide and the Punch in out and Track editing sections of this manual You can use the Multiple Undo Time Jump function only for a current drive disk that was formatted with the Multiple Undo turned on See page 31 for more information on the format operation The Single Undo Redo function enables you to undo and redo the current take of recording or edit Punch in out Copy amp Paste Move amp Paste Erase However if you record a new take you will no longer be able to apply the Undo Redo function to the previous take On the other hand the Multiple Undo Time Jump function can be applied to all takes made after the current drive disk is formatted To undo a take select the date and time at which you finish making the corresponding take of the edit based on the internal clock When you finish recording or editing a take on a current drive disk that was formatted with the Multiple Undo function turned on that take will get the time stamp of the internal clock e g 10 50 37 11 Dec Therefore you can always recall the desired ta
40. gt bs rd a e t i TC a e ys 5 ee to the indication with the flashing that appeared in x l you wi step i Tess ing 7 BP MTC s 01h 00m 00s OOf you may wish to set a preroll of three seconds with an MTC offset of OOh 59m 57s OOF Setting Offset mode Offset Mode menu If you have selected MTC in the Setting Offset mode menu you need to select MTC Offset mode This menu enables you to determine whether the specified MTC is output at ABS 00h 00m OOs OOf or at OOlbar 1beat OOclk bar beat of the Tempo Map lt Notes gt As an example if you set MTC Offset mode to ABS and you wish to start the song from MTC s 1h 00m 00s OOf you may want to set a preroll of three seconds with MTC offset of 00h 59m 57s OOf If you select BAR as the MTC Offset mode a preroll of two measures is automatically set Use 01h 00m 00s OOf do not set a preroll value f you set Offset mode to BAR and use MTC to synchronize sequence software on the computer the tempo of the sequencer may sometimes slip gradually This is because the tempo of the recorder and the tempo of the software are slightly different even if both use the same tempo Some sequence software can read the tempo output from the recorder correctly We recommend that you use the tempo of the recorder on the sequence software No such problems will occur if the sequence software synchronizes the recorder via MIDI clock instead of MTC nitial setting
41. void data will be replied 32 4D edit message move clip status reply This is the reply against the 12 4D move clip command or 22 4D move clip status request 32 4E lt edit message gt move pasie status reply 32 4E edit message mmc time gt move paste status reply The reply against the 12 4E move paste command or the 22 4E move paste status request mmc time indicates the un processed time until completion of move paste editing Fostex Model D2424 Reference Manual MIDI Implementation Chart MMC List 32 4F edit message track exchange status reply This is the reply against the 12 4F track exchange command 33 3E edit message product new program status reply This is the reply against the 13 3E product new program command 33 41 channel lt channel gt digital in channel status reply 33 41 channelz7F count mmc track adat in status re ply This is the reply against the 23 41 digital in ch st request The first channel indicates the track number assigned to the L channel of the digital audio signal S P DIF from the DATA IN connector and the second channel the track number as signed to the R channel If digital in is set to Adat the reply for the first channel will be 7F and then count mmc track in this order In the mmc track gt the track bit map which is the Adat input is expressed by 1 In this equipment the track actually loc
42. 0 and LOCATE REC END 28 Edit key EDIT TC READY Pressing this key enters the recorder to the menu select mode for editing tracks Press this key repeatedly or turn the JOG dial to select menu Edit menus appear in the following order To execute a desired menu select the menu then press the EXECUTE YES key To exit the selection mode press the EXIT NO key If the optional Model 8345 TC SYNC card is installed you can enter the TC READY mode for recording time code by pressing this key while pressing on the SHIFT key Copy Clip Move Clip Copy Paste Move Paste 1 Erase Track Exchange PGM Duplicate 2 1 After you execute copy clip Copy Paste appears After you execute move clip Move Paste appears 2 The program duplicate display will appear only if the current drive was set to ON for the Multiple Undo Function when formatting If the current drive is set to OFF the program duplicate display will not appear even if the EDIT key is pressed Refer to page 66 for more information about Copy Clip Move Clip Copy Paste Erase and Track Exchange Refer to page 36 for more information about program duplicate function lt Note gt This key is enabled only when the recorder is stopped 16 29 Record button RECORD Pressing only this button places the readie
43. 24 drive is 2112MB In addition to 24 Trk the display can also show 8 Trk 4 Trk or 16 Trk 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 12 3 45 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 This indicates that the remaining capacity REMAIN of the drive is 1618MB This indicates that the recorder is formatted in 24 bits In addition to 24 the display can also show 16 and go a 1 2 d 2 LI Ejus 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 mfa OW te aee This indicates that the figure is 0 for the time l 1 2345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 code number of events and that program is PGMO1 Li This indicates that it is formatted in FS 48kHz a ir m In addition to 48kHz the display can also show amp dele A4 1 KHz 96 kHz or 88 2 kHz El wr 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 4895 Version number of the software in this recorder enge will be displayed 4023 4 5 67 891011213141516 17 18 19 2021222324 The display below indicates that the recorder you are using is the D2424 and the software version number is 1 0 9 Br 2 IOM Fs HBU S IOM rs CLOCK BLU m CLOCK 2 thas 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 The ON OFF switching of multiple undo function set at
44. 56 mono tracks can also be selected in addition to All Trk Flashing 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2223 24 Select the mono track 01 56 then press the EXECUTE YES key A menu appears to select the load destination track Model D2424 Reference Manual Saving and Loading Song Data FOStex Flashing 30 32 1234567 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Turn the JOG dial in this state to select the load destination track 01 56 are selectable with the above example If for example you select 01 gt 05 it means Track 1 that is saved will be loaded to Track 5 that is specified as the load destination Flashing e am a i UOM Fs BO E clock INT 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 As an example if the track is setup as shown below data in track 1 will be loaded in track 8 o 3 H H 2 18 2 E Flashing o 0 H H H 1234567 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 6 Select the track then press the EXECUTE YES key It will change to the display for compiling a new program New PGM in the objective track for loading Flashing ot o 3 H 8 2 18 d N E 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 When the JOG dial is rotated while in this state the program in the objective track for loading can be selected and its recording capacity will
45. 57 for details on the chain play mode 13 Store key STORE HOLD This key is for storing time figures or measure beat clock figure in any memory key Following this key when each memory key is pressed data shown in the display will be stored in their respective memory key Using Press LOCATE which is shown after pressing the RECALL key if this key is pressed after input of any number 00 99 in it is registered as time data for the specified locate number If this key is pressed while holding down on the SHIFT key the currently shown time BAR BEAT CLK will be held and this data can then be edited After editing the time thus edited will be stored using the procedure above Refer to page 50 for registering in the memory key 14 Exit key No key EXIT NO EJECT The opposite of the EXECUTE YES key this key is used to stop operation When using a removable type SCSI device for backup if the Drive setting in the SETUP mode is set to SCSI6 the SCSI disk can be ejected by pressing this key while pressing on the SHIFT key when the SCSI disk is stopped 15 Execute Yes key EXECUTE YES CHASE Press this key to execute the operation when you edit data on the hard disk using the edit functions such as Paste and Erase when you put the recorder into SETUP mode or when you set the parameters in the SETUP menu Pressing this key while holding down the SHIFT key allows you to s
46. ABS time base there is a need to priory switch over to the desired time base Cue amp Review function using the REWIND and F FWD buttons You may cue amp review the audio data at five times speed while the recorder is playing The prerequisite of the following operation is that the time base is ABS however the operation can 1 Press the PLAY button to play the audio data 4 Press the PLAY button again to restore the original play back speed 2 Press the F FWD button during playback This cues in the forward direction at five times speed 5 Press the REWIND button instead of the F FWD The PLAY LED and F FWD LED lights up while cuing is button taking place This cues in the rewind direction at five times speed The PLAY LED and REWIND LED lights up while cuing is 3 Adjust the monitor sound of the track to monitor on the taking place mixer 6 Press the PLAY button to restore the original playback speed Cue amp Review function using the SHUTTLE dial You can use the SHUTTLE dial for 1 7 times or 1 8 times 1 Press the PLAY button to start playback 4 Let go of the SHUTTLE dial to return to normal play speed 2 Turn the SHUTTLE dial clockwise during playback The forward direction cue speed variates from 1 7 5 Similarly turn the SHUTTLE dial counterclockwise times speed depending on the degree angle of turning during playback the dial PLAY LED flashes and F FW
47. Digital In is set to a SYNC mode if you try to select Clock you try to select r ceived from Sel menu The display will show Clock Sel D in indicating that the clock is set to Digital In and Video Void w o WORD IN the recorder ignores your operation Video is displayed and you cannot se When receiving word clock from When receiving word clock from lect it s WORD IN the recorder automati WORD IN the recorder synchro See the appendix of clock received Regardless of receiving or not re cally synchronizes to the incom nizes to the incoming clock while the Reference from WORD IN ceiving word clock from WORD ing clock while the DIGITAL and the DIGITAL and EXT indicators manual for details IN the recorder is referenced to EXT indicators light in the dis light in the display adat Async the internal clock When the re play corder receives correct digital sig no clock nals the DIGITAL indicator lights When no word clock is received When no word clock is received the received from in the display the recorder is referenced to the EXT indicator flashes showing that WORD IN internal clock while the EXT in the unit cannot be locked dicator flashes E ARD M Regardless of receiving or not receiving word clock from WORD IN the recorder synchronizes to the external adat digital signals When the recorder receives correct digital signals the DIGITAL and adat Sync no clock EXT
48. GSG GGG GG Ge eC S eO ce 9 Sees Digital Mixer 48 Model D2424 Reference Manual Recording to a Metronome Sound FOStex Creating a Tempo Map Turning the Metronome function on p M M c Set the time signature using the Setting a time Turn the Metronome function on using the Setting signature menu in SETUP mode the Metronome function menu in SETUP mode Refer to the Setting a time signature section on page Refer to the Setting the Metronome function section 107 on page 111 Set a tempo for a given point using the Setting a tempo in SETUP mode Refer to the Setting a tempo section on page 109 4 9 14 Checking the metronome sound 9 After adjusting the recording level stop the l recorder and return to the top of the Program 1 Press the DISP SEL key while holding down the SHIFT key to switch the time base in advance to Startina recordin 2 Start playback from the beginning of the Program 10 Hold down the RECORD button and press the Even if the selected Program does not have any recorded PLAY button to start recording data track 24 outputs the metronome sound and the The READY track will go to the input monitor mode just unit counts time as when the recording level was adjusted The time the level that was actually adjusted with the mixer will
49. INPUT 9 16 in tracks 9 16 and the signals to INPUT 17 24 in tracks 17 24 117 FOStex Model D2424 Reference Manual Changing the Initial Settings SETUP mode Setting digital input 1 While the recorder is stopped press the SETUP key to enter SETUP mode 2 Turn the JOG dial to select D in flashes then press the EXECUTE YES key When D in flashes is selected the presently set digital input content will be shown The flashing is extinguished when the EXECUTE YES key is pressed and the digital input setting will change from lighting to flashing If you do not wish to synchronize the system with digital in select Async and if it is to be synchronized select e Sync 4 After selecting press the EXECUTE YES key again The selected digital signal is registered and in Step 2 will return to flashing When the digital input is setup and the correct digital signal is input DIGITAL will light up in the display If set to synchronous mode of adat Sync or SPDIF a LEN amp 1 J did In the initial setting Analog will flash as shown below Sync and locked to the external digital signal EXT will simultaneously light up az 480 To cancel the operation or to restore the setting bes obtained prior to the EXECUTE YES key press press j Y the STOP button or the EXIT NO key Each time mm you press one of these keys th
50. JOG dial clockwise The question marks of New Program and SURE flash This indication asks you if you wish to set a new Program Program 2 J3 Flashing Flashing Flashing E HEIL 1 pCLOCK INT E ralis 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 4 Press the EXECUTE YES key The recorder automatically enters Title Edit PGM menu in SETUP mode You can enter a title for Program 2 flash If you prefer the default name press the EXIT NO key oL 0 3 8 12 18 24 30 32 Flashing o 3 H H 5 Press the EXECUTE YES key again A default title 0002 appears on the display with and SURE flashing This means that you can enter a name for the new Program If you wish to name the Program with a unique title continue the steps below In either case you can change the title later as explained in Editing a Program title FOStex Model D2424 Reference Manual Handling Programs To enter a title Turn the JOG dial or pressing the NEXT key and PREV key for the flashing cursor to voluntarily input alphanumerics Move the flashing cursor with the SHUTTLE dial The title can contain up to 16 alphanumeric characters You can input the following alphanumerics and symbols 6 When you finish entering the title press the EXECUTE YES key Program 2 PGM 02 and its title are set The dis
51. OUT MMC MTC complied sequence software is activated in the computer Setup of external equipment Setup the following in the sequence software Set to MTC external sync mode EXTERNAL SYNC Set for output of MMC Set to the desired MTC read out frame rate Set start time of the tune which MTC time is to be the first bar Refer to precaution in regards to MTC offset farther on For details refer to Owners Manual of the external equipment Setup of the recorder 1 Because MTC will be output from the recorder set to MTC the SETUP mode MIDI sync signal output setting Refer to page 113 SETUP mode MIDI sync signal output setting for operating procedure 2 Set a random offset time by the SETUP mode MTC offset time setting nitial setting 00h Hour 59m Minute 57s Second OOf Frame 00sf Sub Frame Permissible setup time 00h 00m 00s 00f O0sf 23h 59m 59s 29f 99sf This item can be set for each program The setting can be saved loaded as song data This setting will be held even though power is switched OFF Refer to page 114 SETUP mode MTC offset time setting for operating procedure 3 In the SETUP mode MTC offset mode setting whether the MTC offset time setup in Step 2 should be output ABS at the ABS 00m 00s OOf O0sf position or at the 001BAR 1BEAT 00CLK bar signature must be selected ni
52. Programs The recorder also features Program Change function that enables you to select one of the Programs set on the disk Programs on the disk are something like independent containers You can record play and edit each container without affecting other containers You can also name Programs which is useful for managing songs A ee You can set up to 99 programs independent containers 1 18 24 42 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 This is the Program indication when using an E IDE hard disk as the current drive P will appear before the program number such Ha rs as P01 shown in the example Us rem CLOCK below INT Refer to page 35 for more information on the program select function Refer to page 36 for more information on the duplicating a program Refer to page 37 for more information on the program delete function Refer to page 38 for more information on the editing a program title In regards to the Chain Play MD menu in the SETUP mode see page 57 PPP Note Total available recording time is always the maximum available recording time on the disk regardless of the number of Programs you set on the disk That is if you use up the maximum recording time for one Program you will not be able to record any data in other Programs Note As described in the
53. REMAIN indicator creating additional Programs will consume a small amount of disk space Note Such operations as program compilation and selecting functions only when the Chain Play MD menu in the SETUP mode is Off 26 Model D2424 Reference Manual Before Starting FOSUGX Real tracks and Additional tracks The D2424 contains in addition to 24 real tracks that can be recorded played back edited in real time as one program 32 additional tracks In the current drive formatted at 96kHz 24bits or 88 2kHz 24 bits it will be 8 real tracks 48 additional tracks Real tracks are normally used for real time recording of sound sources and the additional tracks serve the purpose of temporarily storing the sound recorded on the real tracks In other words by temporarily moving data recorded in the real track to an additional track another performance can be recorded on the empty real track To exchange real tracks with additional tracks the D2424 contains a Track exchange function By using this function exchange is possible between all tracks for mono tracks stereo pair tracks 2 tracks and in groups of 8 track units Exchange in 8 track units Exchange in 2 stereo pair track units Track 17 s Track 9 Track 10 Track 11 Track 12 Track 13 Exchange in mono track units Exchange in mono track units
54. Recording method and REMAIN indicator eeeseessssseesseeesee iaiiaeeeai aoni iiad EE asa 25 Managing songs by program change function paee ea Eoia ene eataa R Sania 26 Real tracks and Additional tracks 0 cececcsseeesseeeeteeeeseseeeceeeeecaeseeecseeesecaesecaseeeesacaeeesassesesaeeesesaeeesaeeeeesaseeeesaterseeateneaes 27 Input monitoring and playback monitoring seseseeeeseeeeeeenne nennen nnne entrent Ekek nne krea 28 Audio file and 277 70 Er 29 Formatting and Optimizing disks Formatting a current drive diSKscsmonsrino npo E N 31 Formatting a brand new hard disk Current drive eese esee ee eee ente tn ernannt nane 32 Reformatting the current drive or newly formatting the backup drive esses 33 Formatting a backup disk SCSI disk or optional DVD RAM disk essent 33 Optimizing the isle cuore c rere ter ere rete eerie i rep eer DI Eti RLNIN RI AE C DEDE dE 34 Handling Programs Crealitig a new programin 22a aA eee LE toe Re o S EE E Lope 35 Duplic tirig a Progr aA o aces rede serui tienden eecepeteeptrheepeinio eter re Piura iiit E AE eea A a AAE EAREN 36 Using aiprogram chanige tunto emn 37 DG le tir kenelel MERECE ERREERHHH E ME 37 Editingia program titles E M 38 Punch In Out Whiatis Punch In Outtecording oit citer ipee ee a eto pet main Ds edt Lr Lu iet botas 39 Auto Pun
55. Refer to page 115 SETUP mode MTC offset mode setting for operating procedure and details 3 Set the SETUP mode MTC offset time setting to the same offset time as in the recorder 1 Refer to page 114 SETUP mode MTC offset time setting for operating procedure and details 4 Set the SETUP mode MIDI device ID setting to 01 in the recorder 2 and to 02 in the recorder 3 Refer to page 120 SETUP mode MIDI device ID setting for operating procedure and details 5 Press the EXECUTE YES key While holding down the SHIFT key set slave mode to On CHASE indicator will be flashing in the display 6 Using the SETUP mode Slave type setting set slave type to Free Slave type initial setting Vari Permissible setup item Vari Free This item can be set for each program The setting can be saved loaded as song data This setting will be held even though power is switched OFF Refer to page 116 SETUP mode Slave type setting for operating procedure and details 7 Set to Word the clock setting by the SETUP mode Clock setting Refer to page 121 SETUP mode Clock setting for operating procedure and details 8 Press the DISP SEL key while holding down the SHIFT key to change the time base display to MTC 81 FOStex Model D2424 Reference Manual MIDI Sync Function Note After th
56. Refer to page 62 for previewing data at the AUTO PUNCH QUT point Memory keys CLIPBOARD IN CLIPBOARD OUT AUTO RTN START AUTO PUNCH IN AUTO PUNCH OUT and AUTO RTN END keys have the following common functions e Pressing a Memory key to recall the point the key is storing displays the memory data time or bar beat clock currently stored in that key then the recorder enters data edit mode To edit data use the SHUTTLE dial to move among the digits and then use the JOG dial to change the value e After you finish editing data press the STORE key and then press one of the Memory keys into which you want to store the point The edited data will be stored in the specified Memory key e While the current position of the recorder is indicated press the STORE key then one of the Memory keys into which you want to store the data The current position or the recorder will be stored in the Memory key You can do this while the recorder is running or stopped e Press a desired Memory key and then press the LOCATE key to locate the point stored in that Memory key time or bar beat clock e In Setup mode you can save or load song data for each Program e All data will be retained after you turn off the power Refer to page 50 for more information on memory data Refer to page 54 for more information on the Locate function Refer to pages 26 and 37 for more informatio
57. a time E Trk 182 ENTE Trk 53854 Trk 55856 Program 1 P01 Program 99 P99 adat digital signal You can save and load each Program individually After about five seconds of pilot signal shown in gray in the diagram below song data in the current drive is output to a connected adat Eight track audio data shown in black in the diagram is output To save the data from Real tracks 1 24 data will be output three times which takes the same amount of time as the song duration ABS 0 to REC END To save all data including Additional tracks 1 56 eight track data will be output seven times which takes seven times the song duration Saved data is also located eight tracks at a time Trk 9 16 Program 1 P01 Program 2 P02 Program 99 P99 SCSI or IDE2 You can save and load each Program individually or all program All Real track data and Additional track data is output simultaneously to a SCSI disk as shown in black in the diagram Therefore saving and loading a Program takes much less time relative to a DAT or adat No pilot signal or beep is recorded If the available disk space is smaller than the song data size you may use multiple disks up to 99 disks to save and load an entire song You can also save load WAV files in DOS formatted disks Trk 1 56
58. allows you to fine tune the pitch The Digital input setup function to allow digital recording of S P DIF digital signals from CD MD and adat digital signals from adat equipment are provided A digital output setup function is provided to digitally output by selecting from the real track any 2 output sources S P DIF or 8 output sources adat You can also use the DATA INPUT and OUTPUT jacks to an external DAT or adat and to save and load song data audio data and SETUP mode settings to and from the DAT or adat High speed SCSI Save Load is also an option by connecting a non DAT or adat SCSI backup drive WAV file Save Load is possible by using a DOS formatted SCSI type disk Save load of FMDS 3 or WAV file is possible by using the E IDE hard disk for backup or the optional Model 9046 DVD RAM drive In addition to cueing by JOG SHUTTLE digital scrubbing using the envelope function is also possible MIDI clock and Song Position Pointer can be transmitted according to the internal programmable Tempo Map You can set up a synchronization system with a sequencer or a rhythm machine without wasting a track You can use the recorder as a sync slave machine by sending MTC from a connected device The recorder supports MTC MMC and Fostex System Exclusive Message which allows for advanced control and high precision synchronization from external sequencing software You can set the device number and MTC frame r
59. available adat SPDIF SCSI IDE2 Programs available When using an adat SPDIF PO1 P99 each program individually When using a SCSI IDE2 gt PO1 P99 or All program e Track available When using an adat or DAT Tracks 1 8 1 16 1 24 1 32 1 40 1 48 1 56 9 16 9 24 9 32 9 40 9 48 9 56 17 24 17 32 17 40 17 48 17 56 25 32 25 40 25 48 25 56 33 40 33 48 33 56 41 48 or 49 56 When using a SCSI IDE2 gt All tracks 1 56 will be automatically selected 89 FOStex Model D2424 Reference Manual Saving and Loading Song Data 1 Press the SETUP key The recorder will enter the Setup mode 2 Use the JOG dial to select Load PGM and then press the EXECUTE YES key The message Load Device and the type of digital signal to be loaded SPDIF adat SCSI or IDE2 will flash on the display 2 ot BT 24 uo rs TVD LS tie CLOCK INT o 3 mm HI s mm 12 mm 18 mm 24 mm 30 mm 1 a2 m 2 DIGITAL Flashing BIT 24 UOM Fs dedit CLOCK INT 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 3 Rotate the JOG dial to select the type of digital signal format SPDIF or adat to be used for the load operation Selecting adat will load data in the adat digital signal format Selecting SPDIF will load data in the S P DIF digital signal format 4 Press the EXECUTE YES key The digital signal selected is set and the program nu
60. be assigned with a specific locate number from 01 99 This means the desired locate number can be specified to locate that specific time data The memory data of the LOCATE key can also be edited in the same manner as the data in the Memory key After editing the data the LOCATE key can locate that point or even be re stored as data for other Memory keys lt Notes gt e The last data located with the Memory key or LOCATE key is constantly stored as LOCATE number 00 However this data is constantly replaced after every LOCATE command Therefore do not use Locate Number 00 for independent Locate data e You cannot preview the data stored in the LOCATE key though it is possible to preview data stored in other Memory keys f you use a time base that is not an ABS time there is a need to priory switch to the desired time base using the SHIFT key and DISP SEL key Any editing or storing of data for the LOCATE point is valid only for the program that is currently started up Storing in real time You can store the locate point in the ABS MTC or BAR BEAT CLK Time Base in real time while the recorder is playing Flashing 1 Press the PLAY button to start playback 2 Press the STORE key the STORE LED lights up The memory number selection menu will appear as Lh follows E io pm E 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 E 52 Model D2424 Reference Manual
61. computers Use a cable with connectors that conform to the standards for connecting a SCSI drive e The SCSI drive should be terminated Install a SCSI terminator or turn the termination switch to on if the drive has a termination switch like a zip drive e You must format the SCSI disk after you connect it to the recorder Refer to the Formatting section on the next page for the formatting procedure l 1l SCSI terminator Removable SCSI drive SCSI connector Half pitch 50 pin SCSI cable lt CAUTION gt In using a removable disk for backup purpose be sure Write Protect is disabled Please note that it cannot be used in the Write Protect mode 91 FOStex Model D2424 Reference Manual Saving and Loading Song Data Formatting a SCSI disk An unformatted disk or a disk used with the computer can also be used Check to see that the data on the disk is no longer necessary prior to formatting a disk that was previously used with the computer Once formatting is started it cannot be stopped The formatting process will erase all data Be especially careful not to erase the data that you still need The prerequisite here is that a removable disk is used 1 Connect the SCSI device to the recorder and turn the power on to the both machines 2 If you are using a removable disk insert the dis
62. data The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the recorder Setting the operating clock 1 While the recorder is stopped press the SETUP 3 With the JOG dial select the auto EE mode key to enter SETUP mode 4 After selecting On or Off press the EXECUTE 2 Turn the JOG dial to select Auto EE Mode YES key again flashes then press the EXECUTE YES key The selected On Off will be registered and the Step 2 A flashing will extinguish by pressing the EXECUTE will return to flashing YES key and the auto EE mode information that was lit will being flashing Initial setting it will show Off 5 Press the EXIT NO key or the STOP button repeatedly to exit SETUP mode To cancel the operation or to restore the setting obtained prior to the EXECUTE YES key press press the STOP button or the EXIT NO key Each time you press one of these keys the recorder returns to the previous hierarchy level of the menu and finally exits SETUP mode and displays the previous Time Base 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Setup of the Foot switch function Foot SW menu At the Setup of the foot switch function menu functions of a foot switch connected to the FOOT SW jack must be set up Functions of the foot switch are manual punch in out or PLAY STOP of D2424 Initially this is set to the Punch in out function explained in Using the f
63. disappear when the EXECUTE YES key is pressed and the currently set figure will flash To cancel the operation or to restore the setting obtained prior to the EXECUTE YES key press press the STOP button or the EXIT NO key Each time you press one of these keys the recorder returns to the previous hierarchy level of the menu and finally exits SETUP mode and displays the previous Time Base 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Flashing 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 E 130 Model D2424 Reference Manual MIDI Implementation Chart MMC List FOSt X Digital Recorder Date Model D2424 MIDI Implementation Chart Version V1 00 Transmi i Function ansmitted Recognized Remarks Basic Default Channel Changed Default x Mode Message x Altered FEO IOS IO IOI II IIIT OI II II Note x Number True voice mm Velocity Note ON Note OFF After Key s Touch Channel s Pitch Bend x x Control Change x x Program x Change True dokn x System Exclusive O rem 1 O rem 2 Quarter frame O Q Common Song Position O x Song Select x x Tune x x System Clock O Real Time Commands O rem 3 Local ON OFF x x Aux All Notes OFF x x Message Active Sense x x Reset x x Notes rem 1 MMC Device ID 00 99 127 MTC Identity reply FOSTEX Exclusive r
64. display will indicate the time base set for the loaded Program Press the STOP button or EXIT NO key to return to one previous menu prior to the EXECUTE YES key or if you want to cancel a procedure Every time you press these keys you will move back one previous hierarchy and eventually escape from the SETUP mode and return to the time base display Note that all the song data saved will be invalid if you press the STOP button or EXIT NO key while saving at lt Step 10 gt Model D2424 Reference Manual Saving and Loading Song Data FOStex Saving the data using SCSI This procedure will SAVE LOAD using a removable SCSI drive disk zip MO DVD RAM etc that is a backup disk In save load using SCSI the program can be selected separately or in whole A backup purpose SCSI disk is generally used after formatted in the backup format however a DOS formatted computer format SCSI disk can also be used to SAVE LOAD in WAV Data saved in WAV can be re loaded and even directly be read by the computer Therefore this kind of data can be used as music software as well Connecting a SCSI device Refer to the diagram to connect a SCSI device to a D2424 Notes on connection e Before making connections make sure that both the recorder and the SCSI drive are turned off e One SCSI drive may be connected on the recorder e The SCSI connector on the recorder is a half pitch 50 pin connector compatible with Macintosh
65. ejected 96 Model D2424 Reference Manual Saving and Loading Song Data FOStex Saving and Loading with IDE2 E IDE Hard disk DVD RAM It is possible to setup an optional Model 9044 Bay and Caddy to mount an E IDE hard disk IDE2 or optional DVD RAM drive Model 9046 for backup purposes With this setup it becomes possible to save load files in WAV RIFF WAVE file format hereafter WAV described later or save load in FDMS 3 V3 0 Fostex Disk Management System 3 format described earlier lt Precautions gt e This model can only save load in IDE2 E IDE or DVD RAM FDMS 3 Ver3 0 format When using an IDE2 to save load WAV files priority format it in FAT16 DOS on another PC e Our Service Division will assemble optional Model 9044 or Model 9046 For installation please contact the Fostex distributor in your territory e Note that the optional Model 9046 DVD RAM drive only provides limited space on the disk when using it as a backup drive For more details refer to page 86 Precautions When Using a DVD RAM Drive Here we will save files in FDMS 3 Mode on a backup 4 Press the EXECUTE YES key while FDMS3 is E IDE hard disk or optional DVD RAM flashing Go to the Save PGM menu in the SETUP mode to A menu appears so you can select the program that save S P DIF and adat digital signals described you want to save The currently selected program earlier in the same manner as saving on SCSI devices number fl
66. erase start point to the AUTO PUNCH IN key 2 Use the Preview function to check the stored edit and the end point to the AUTO PUNCH OUT key points and adjust them if necessary e If you wish to erase the data from a specific point store the REC END or later point as the erase end point Refer to the lt Note gt for information on storing the REC END point e See Storing and editing the locate points to the memory keys on page 50 3 Specify a track to erase and execute the function 70 Model D2424 Reference Manual Editing Tracks FOSt X Checking and adjusting the edit points After you store the edit points you can check them on the display by pressing the corresponding keys You may also adjust the points 1 While the recorder section is stopped press and hold down the SHIFT key and press the memory key for which you wish to check the edit point You can preview fade out at the AUTO PUNCH IN point and fade in at AUTO PUNCH OUT point 2 Trim the edit point while previewing e Refer to Preview Function on page 62 for more information Executing Erase 1 Press the RECORD TRACK select key to select the track to erase to set it READY You can select a mono track or multiple tracks including all tracks The selected track indication flashes 2 Press the EDIT key repeatedly until Erase flashes on the display 8 Press the EXECUTE YES key
67. existing in the track a new program will be made automatically As this delete current program is executed in a comparatively short time 33 3F edit message 01 completed gt will be sent back immediately upon completing the execution If it cannot be executed for some reason an error message will be sent back 13 41 lt channel gt lt channel gt digital in ch select command The audio signal input from SPDIF digital in to assigned to the destination track specified by channel The first channel shown in the command is the SPDIF L channel input and the second channel the R channel input lt channel 0 gt chan nel 0 gt indicates the normal analog input In D2424 chan nels 1 and 2 only can be selected for other than lt channel 0 gt 1341 lt channel 7F gt lt count gt lt mmc track Adat in select com mand Channel 7F indicates that it is Adat In Normally it will be lt count 0 gt and all channels will be inputs from Adat In If count 0 mmc track is indicates then only the tracks selected will be Adat In inputs lt channel 0 gt lt channel 0 gt indicates the normal analog input 13 42 lt channel gt lt channel gt digital out ch select command The source channel for digital out is selected Normally the first channel shown will be the SPDIF L chan nel data and the second channel the SPDIF R channel out put 00 00 is the default setting By FDMS 3 V3 0 any
68. frame rate menu enables you to set the frame rate for MTC output from the MIDI OUT connector of the recorder to an external MIDI device If you have already set the type of MIDI sync output signal to MTC you need to set the frame rate Use the frame rate of MTC received by the external MIDI device or sequence software Initial setting 25 25 frames e Setting range of frame rate 24 25 29df 29nd 30df 30nd You can set the value for each Program individually The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the song data The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the recorder 113 FOStex Model D2424 Reference Manual Changing the Initial Settings SETUP mode Setting an MTC frame rate 1 While the recorder is stopped press the SETUP 3 Turn the JOG dial to enter the desired frame rate key to enter SETUP mode Rotating the JOG dial clockwise or counter clockwise displays available frame rates as an alternative 2 Turn the JOG dial to select Frame Rate flashes then press the EXECUTE YES key 4 Press the EXECUTE YES key The current frame rate setting appears on the display The selected frame rate is stored and the display returns Press the EXECUTE YES key to turn off the flashing to the indication with a flashing that appeared in character the current setting flashes step 2 The initial setting of 25 flashes as shown belo
69. from 00 to 99 However if the device ID number of the message the recorder receives is 7F the recorder will recognizes it to perform the corresponding operation regardless of its device ID setting Initial setting 00 e Option 00 99 This setting is shared by all Programs in the same disk The settings cannot be saved and loaded as part of the song data The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the recorder Setting the MIDI device ID 1 While the recorder is stopped press the SETUP key to enter SETUP mode 2 Turn the JOG dial to select Device ID flashes then press the EXECUTE YES key The current MIDI device ID number appears on the display Pressing the EXECUTE YES key turns off the flashing character and the MIDI device ID number flashes With the initial setting 00 flashes as shown below 120 mMm Fs FEL 1753 INT o H H H 2 id El 30 2 L BT 24 IOM Fs FEL CLOCK INT esscQ BBESESeeccO 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Model D2424 Reference Manual Changing the Initial Settings SETUP mode FOStex 3 Use the JOG dial to set the desired MIDI device To cancel the operation or to restore the setting ID number obtained prior to the EXECUTE YES key press press Turning the JOG dial clockwise increments the value the STOP button or the EXIT NO key Each time a
70. indicators light in the display When Digital In is set to a SYNC mode if you try to select Clock received from Sel menu The display will show Clock Sel D in indicating that the clock is set to Digital In and WORD IN the recorder ignores your operation Digital recording to external digital equipment Tunes recorded on the D2424 can be recorded on external digital equipment such as MD DAT CD R or adat In order to digital record to external digital equipment digital signals to be output at the D2424 DATA OUTPUT connector must be set to SP DIF or adat The initial setup is adat by the Setup of digital output menu in the D2424 SETUP mode The currently active program can be digitally recorded and Setup of digital outputs will be common to all programs Connecting external digital equipment 1 Use an optical cable to connect the DATA OUTPUT connector of the recorder to the OPTICAL IN or adat IN jack of the external digital equipment Set the external equipment input port to digital so that digital signals can be input Because some digital equipment must be externally synchronized against digital signals in addition to setting the input port to digital be sure to refer to the operating manual of any digital equipment to be used Depending on the digital signal that is output the DATA OUTPUT connector will function as explained below lt Notes on interconn
71. must have file names written as WAV Other file names cannot be acknowledged by this recorder Unknown file names will not be acknowledged and could cause malfunction Extreme care should be taken when changing file names and making folders on a computer e The first six letters will be the title shown in the SETUP mode Title Edit display e The last two letters represent each track number 1 56 of the WAV file which are to be saved loaded e The last WAV is the extension which indicate that this is a WAV file e File name of the WAV file which is to be saved in the backup disk of this recorder will all be recorded in capital letters However in certain computers this WAV file name will be displayed in small letters Method to load specific tracks The backup disk in which files are saved will contain files from 01 WAV up to 56 WAV Should these files be deleted moved from the root directory for example into a another folder or the file name changed which cannot be acknowledged this recorder will not recognize this file When a backup disk changed in this manner is loaded only WAV files with file names WAV which are located in an acknowledgeable root directory can be loaded For example if the zero number of data made at save is deleted from the backup disk and then load is executed only WAV files recorded with any other sound can be loaded When load
72. on the Track Exchange function see page 72 Selecting a recording Program Sm n nm en t o u e 1 If you already have multiple Programs select the desired Program using the Program Select function See page 35 for more information on the Program Select function Setting the digital output Use the digital output setup menu in Setup mode to assign output tracks With the default setting the digital output is set to adat You can select adat or SP DIF To output adat digital signals to a connected adat device select adat To output S P DIF signals to a connected CD R MD or DAT recorder select SP DIF l See page 118 for more information on the D out menu When you finish setting the parameters in Setup mode press the EXIT NO key or the STOP button to exit Setup mode Connecting a Digital Mixer The following explanations assume that this is digital mixer which can input digital signals whose clock source can be setup at digital in 9G GG OCF O GO 9 O99 99 5 HK GO GG KO G GO OO GO X9 Digital Mixer Precaution against the digital loop When interconnecting D2424 and a digital mixer as shown in above schematic if the D2424 Setup of the digital input is set to adat or Sync synchronous mode of S P DIF and the digital mixer clock source is set to DI
73. pressing the EXECUTE YES key and except for EE each program number currently in the disk can be selected via the JOG dial SienccQ 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 3 Input the chain number via the JOG dial and press the EXECUTE YES key The flashing section will move from left to the right EE I BELaHeowes 9 Flashing 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 ones 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 4 Select the desired program number via the JOG dial and press the EXECUTE YES key The chain number of the selected program will be set and the same as in lt Step 2 gt the left section will flash N ote gt For example if it has been set as shown below the In order to execute chain play AU TORIN setting will be for playback of the program 5 tune in START point and AUTO RTN END point must be setup in each program to be played back Refer to previous page 50 for how to register memory points the second order If the chain play list is edited even once the Chain Play Mode will be set OFF In such case after setup of the chain play list reset the Chain Play Mode to ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Repeat these procedures to set up the chain play number in the desired program 58 Model D2424 Reference Manual Chain Play function FOSt
74. punch O LOCATE 3 The located time data is always stored as time data in Locate Number 00 OTAKE PEDIT 54 Specify the Locate Number to locate data Press the RECALL key The Locate Number selection menu appears 1 O RECALL 2 Turn the JOG dial or press the NEXT key PREV key to select the desired number CHARACTER gt 3 Press the LOCATE key once The time stored in the selected Locate Number appears LOCATE LOCATE C The time data of the selected LOCATE number is swiftly located The located time data is constantly stored as time data in Locate Number 00 4 Press the LOCATE key again Locate a specified point Refer to Editing and storing locate data in the chapter Storing a Locate Point Edit Point for information on how to edit the data and on pressing the LOCATE key instead of the STORE key The point at specified time value or bar beat clock value will be located immediately Locate the last located point Directly press the LOCATE key The time data of Locate number 00 is located Locate number 00 is always update with the last data located excluding LOCATE ABS 0 and LOCATE REC END Therefore you will locate the data in memory number 00 every time you directly press the LOCATE key LOCATE gt Model D2424 Reference Manual Locate Function FOStex Auto Play function The Auto Play fun
75. received D2424 will reply with 32 4E edit message 02 mmc time gt or 32 4E edit mes sage 00 mmc time indicates unprocessed time until completion 23 41 digital in channel status request 23 41 adat in channel status request The command inquiring the digital in channel setup status When this command is received D2424 will reply with 33 41 lt channel gt lt channel gt or 33 41 channel 7F count mmc track 23 42 digital out channel status request 23 42 adat out channel status request The inquiring the digital out channel setup status When this command is received D2424will reply with 33 42 channel channel or 33 42 lt channel 7F gt chan nel O gt 23 43 program status request The command inquiring the presently operating program num ber When this command is received D2424 will reply with 33 43 lt program gt 23 44 click on off status request The command inquiring the metronome on off status of D2424 When this command is received D2424 will reply with 33 44 lt on off gt 23 45 level status request The command inquiring the present output level data of the 1 24 tracks In D2424 as the level data is updated about every 40msec inquiry in 40msec units is effective When this command is received D2424 will reply with 33 45 count 10 level data 23 46 resolution status request The command for inquiring the resolution
76. repeatedly until you are ready e Select a Program for Punch In Out recording nitialize the recorder Note You can use the Punch In Out recording only for Real tracks If you wish to use Punch In Out recording for data on an Additional track first move the data to the Real tracks Before doing punch in out check that the SETUP mode Chain Play MD menu is Off If it is set in other than Off chain play will be executed Auto Punch In Out To perform Auto Punch In Out recording you need to specify the Auto Punch In point recording start point and the Auto Punch Out point recording end point Previewing and trimming the edit points You can check the stored edit points by pressing the Storing the edit points corresponding memory keys to display them on the ee LCD You can also change the points if necessary 1 Refer to Storing the edit points to set the Auto In this example use the Preview function to fine Punch In Out points tune the point while previewing Store the Auto Punch In point to the AUTO PUNCH IN key and the Auto Punch Out point to the AUTO PUNCH OUT key 1 While the recorder is stopped hold down the T SHIFT key and press the memory key Refer to page 50lfor more iiformation n storing Pressing the AUTO PUNCH IN key enables you to listen the edit points to the sound at the AUTO PUNCH IN point previewing the sound rise fade out Pressing
77. return to the display prior to entering the edit mode Regardless as to whether Exch 01 08 09 16 or Exch 09 16 01 08 is input there will be no difference in the fact that tracks 1 8 and tracks 9 16 have been exchanged lt Note gt You cannot select the same track for left and right If the same track is mistakenly specified Select Err will be displayed for an instant and then returned to the display prior to execution Exch Mono then pressing the EXECUTE YES key the display will change as shown below This display indicates that at present tracks 1 and 2 can be exchanged is indicating the track name of the flashing track In this case the name of track 01 Flashing 4 Cir Fs miS CLOCK INT 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 28 24 2 If the JOG dial is rotated when 01 is flashing the mono track unit numbers 01 56 will be alternately displayed 3 After selecting the left side track move to the right side flashing by pressing the NEXT key Flashing 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 4 The same as in Step 2 display the desired track by rotating the JOG dial Press the REV key or rotate the SHUTTLE dial to move the flashing number from right to left 5 After selecting the left and right tracks press the EXECUTE YES key Track exchange is executed and simultaneous with completion COMPLETED
78. save is not possible unless quantization is same for both the current drive and the backup drive In other words when using a current drive formatted in 44 1 or 48kHz 24 bit 24 bit Backup will always be displayed 7 Press and hold down the RECORD button and press the EXECUTE YES key REMAIN lights up and formatting starts As the formatting operation progresses the size of the area to be formatted on the disk will count down on the display When formatting is complete COMPLETED will appears 8 Press the EXIT NO key or the STOP button to quit the SETUP mode The recorder returns to the ABS display of the Program that was selected before it entered Setup mode Your backup purpose SCSI disk has been formatted after completing the steps up to this point The SCSI disk is now ready to SAVE LOAD To continuously format another disk remove the disk from the SCSI drive and then repeat the same procedures Press the eject switch on the SCSI drive to remove the disk from the SCSI drive Model D2424 Reference Manual Saving and Loading Song Data FOStex Saving data of an individual Program When saving with a SCSI disk it is possible to save each program or all programs e Output format available Programs available e Track available 41 48 or 49 56 adat SPDIF SCSI IDE2 When using an adat SPDIF gt PO1 P99 each program individually When using a SCSI IDE2 When us
79. set to IDE eject it using the SCSI drive EJECT switch 32 All Input LED ALL INPUT This is lit when all track input monitors are set to ON by pressing the TRACK SHIFT key while pressing the SHIFT key and extinguished when set to OFF While in the SETUP mode it is also possible to automatically set it to all input monitors while the recorder is in the stop mode For details refer to page 28 at end of this manual 33 Track shift LED 9 16 17 24 green This is lit when the selectable recording track is shifted to 9 16 or 17 24 34 Hard disk access LED green This LED lights up or blinks when the hard disk is writing or reading data lt CAUTION gt Do not turn the power off while this LED is lit or blinking Otherwise data on the hard disk may be damaged 35 Foot switch jack FOOT SW Connector PHONE jack Punch in out also for rehearsal or PLAY STOP of the recorder can be done by foot by connecting the optional foot switch The foot switch function can be changed in the SETUP mode It will not function for punch in out function in the initial setting Refer to page 42 for information about Punch In Out recording using the foot switch lt Note gt Be sure to use an unlatch type foot switch if you use a foot switch other than the Model 8051 Otherwise a malfunction could occur 36 Meter display This meter display shows the signal level and settings
80. setting for operating procedure and details 6 Press the DISP SEL key while holding down the SHIFT key to show time base in the MTC display Notes on MTC related setups By MTC offset time setting and MTC offset mode setting at what position ABS 0 or OO1BAR 1BEAT OOCLK should the setup MTC MTC offset time is to be output is set When setting the start time of the tune in the sequence software by these setups be careful of the following points Offset mode For ABS If playback is started from ABS 0 since MTC will be output starting from the MTC offset time that has been set the start time of the tune set by the sequence software must be set about 3 seconds later from the MTC offset time that was setup This will provide time because the sequence software cannot sync immediately after MTC is output For example if the initial setting of 00h 59m 57s OOf OOsf is used set the start time of the tune to 01h 00m OOs OOf If playback is thus started from ABS 0 LOCATE ABS 0 sync will be obtained by the time it reaches the first bar and therefore it can be made to sync from the head of the tune Offset mode For BAR As mentioned before because the ABS 0 position is set at the OO2BAR 1BEAT OOCLK position the setup MTC offset time can be set to the head of the tune without taking into account the time until reaching sync as mentioned above The length of the time two bars beforehand will c
81. that have the adat format digital recording function When a 24 bit data recorded in the recorder is saved to a 16 bit digital device Audio 16 bit only will be saved Also when a 20 bit data is saved Audio 20 bit only will be saved When loading DAT or adat data if it is 16 bit even if the current drive of the recorder has be formatted in 24 bits only the upper 16 bits will be loaded and the lower 8 bits will be 0 Likewise in a 20 bit machine the upper 20 bits only will be loaded and the lower 4 bits will be t n Note when saving data using DAT or adat gt Song data can be saved as a real track additional track or ALL data Please note the following points when saving song data using a DAT or adat device The save time of the data depends on the time of the song data ABS O REC END on the real track Therefore if you attempt to save data that exists on an additional track that is longer than the data on the real track the data on the additional track will only be saved for the same amount of time as the data on the real track Let s say you have 10 minutes recorded on the real track and you tentatively move it to the additional track track exchange function Then you save a real track by leaving that moved portion blank which leaves you with only 3 minutes of recording on the track This means only 3 minutes of the data on the additional track will be saved and the remaining 7 minutes will not be saved If you want lon
82. the AUTO PUNCH OUT key enables you to listen Note to the sound at the AUTO PUNCH OUT point previewing Make sure that you specify an Auto Punch In point the sound fall fade in that precedes the Auto Punch Out point If the Auto Punch Out point precedes the Auto Punch In point 2 Trim the edit point while auditioning the sound Void Out appears and you will be unable to perform Auto Punch In Out recording e Refer to page 62 for more information on the Preview function 39 FOStex Model D2424 Reference Manual Punch In Out Rehearsing Auto Punch In Out recording In Rehearsal mode the READY track assumes input monitoring mode between the Auto Punch In and Out points and the sound is not recorded You can practice Auto Punch In Out operation repeatedly before you proceed to actual recording Locate the recording start position slightly before the Auto Punch In point lt Tips for rehearsal gt Set the preroll value while referring to the Changing the Initial Settings SETUP Mode chapter In this way the recorder can locate a point that precedes the Auto Punch In point by the specified preroll value This enables you to start playback slightly before the Punch In point Refer to page 105 for more information on Changing the Initial Settings The recorder will repeat playback data between the AUTO RTN START point and the AUTO RTN END point if you set the AUTO RTN START poi
83. the AUTO RTN END point automatically locate the AUTO RTN START point then play up to the AUTO RTN END point until you cancel the function by pressing the STOP button To enable this function both AUTO PLAY mode and AUTO RTN mode should be turned on and the AUTO RTN START point and the AUTO RTN END point should already be set Using this function will facilitate the Auto Punch In Out and Manual Punch In Out rehearsal See Hint after the following section 2 Press the AUTO RTN AUTO PLAY key to turn on the PLAY RTN AUTO PLAY LEDs AUTORTN be AUTO PLAY lt Note gt If the Chain Play mode in the SETUP mode is set other than Off ON OFF of AUTO REPEAT cannot be ex ecuted lt Operation of the Auto Repeat mode gt AUTO RTN START point AUTO RTN END point 3 Start playback a little before the AUTO RTN START point The recorder operates as shown in the diagram and stops at the AUTO RTN START point PLAYBACK m T u 4 LOCATE PLAYBACK START e You can set a preroll time in the Preroll Time menu in SETUP mode so that the recorder will start playback preroll time before the locate point You can set the preroll time from 0 to 10 seconds Refer to the chapter Changing the Initial Settings SETUP Mode on page 112 1 Store the AUTO RTN START and AUTO RTN END points Refer to the chapter Storing a Locate Point Edit Point on page 50 for info
84. the Slave type indicator flashes With the initial setting Vari flashes as shown below The recorder re chase window is fixed to ten frames That is if an offset between the master device and slave device exceeds ten frames the recorder interprets that as out of sync and tries to chase and lock to MTC sent from the master device This operation is called re chasing During the re chase operation audio output is muted If the slave machine slips with MTC from the master device by less than ten frames the slave machine continues running while recognizing the slippage EP x p UDM Fs i HB USZ Tok es When you set the Slave type the Vari Pitch function is automatically disabled The VARI PITCH indicator turns off 4 Press the EXECUTE YES key The selected Slave type is stored and flashes oL 3 H 3 JOM Fs Setar clock INT 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 To cancel the operation or to restore the setting obtained prior to the EXECUTE YES key press press the STOP button or the EXIT NO key Each time you 3 Use the JOG dial to select the desired Slave type press one of these keys the recorder returns to the Rotating the JOG dial clockwise and counter clockwise previous hierarchy level of the menu and finally exits will cause the Vari and Free indicators to flash in SETUP mode and displays the previous Time Base sequence
85. the initial menu to go to the SETUP mode 2 Turn the JOG dial to select Load PGM flashes Then press the EXECUTE YES key The menu to select the loading device appears SCSI is the default setting and the indication flashes 9L BiT 24 3 UDM Fs DL H clock INT E 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 DIGITAL Flashing m 3 JOM Fs BT ane 3 E H i 5 5 clock x El Eu a2 a2 m x 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 3 Turn the JOG dial to select IDE2 Now IDE2 is flashing Press the EXECUTE YES key 98 IDE2 Device Name appears Then the menu to select the program to load appears Flashing 32 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 You can select the Load All choice in addition to individual backup programs by turning the JOG dial at this stage Load All refers to loading all programs that are saved You can set the program range to load as in the case with Save mentioned earlier by executing the Load All feature The following display appears if you select Load All then press the EXECUTE YES key Now you can set the range of the program to load you can load the programs in the similar way as the programs were Saved as described earlier Flashing q C z 3 Lm Po WOU we B E CLOCK 30 E
86. the track is READY be extinguished in the SAFE mode and be lighted during recording In the current drive formatted to 96 kHz 24 bits only tracks 1 8 will function ABS Lights up when ABS is selected as Time base MTC Lights up when MTC is selected as Time Base Lights up to indicate a bar beat clock value when IGNATURE ze E BAR BEAT CLK is selected as Time Base Lights up when the recorder enters data edit mode enabling you to edit data Pressing the LOCATE LOCATE key while this indicate is lit will cause the recorder to locate the position of the displayed time or the bar beat clock value Lights up to indicate available recording time and REMAIN Space on the disk MTC IN With the optional Model 8345 TC SYNC card installed this will be lit wnen MTC or LTC is TC IN externally input MTC OFFSET Lights up when MTC OFFSET menu is selected in SETUP mode Flashes when Slave mode is turned on CHASE When a signal is locked the flashing indicator lights up steadily PGM Lights up to indicate the current program number Lights up when the tempo setting menu is selected TEMPO in SETUP mode BIT 16 24 Sampling frequency quantization at formatting FS are displayed This will also blink to warn that Hz digital signals S P DIF or adat of a wrong sampling frequency are being input SURE This message is shown to confirm whether or not you wish to execute a certain operation 20
87. time e If the locate point is shifted outside the range of the preview playback as a result of trimming Void Data and the locate point indication appear alternately In this case you cannot use the Preview function Trim the position again so that it will be within the playback range e When Auto Punch mode is turned on and you trim the Auto Punch In or Auto Punch Out point while previewing the sound with Void Data indicated on the display Auto Punch mode will be cancelled 1 Start previewing the sound by following the steps 3 To change the unit of trimming turn the SHUTTLE described on the previous page dial m These key or dial will change the trimming unit as 2 Use the JOG dial to trim the position follows When previewing starts the unit of JOG trimming f flashes on the screen Time base For example value of SF sub frame flashes if ABS Time ABS or MTC BAR BEAT CLK Base or MTC Time Base is selected CLK clock flashes if BAR BEAT CLK is selected The flashing value also SHUTTLE dial SF gt H M gt S F CLK gt BAR J indicates the position you can trim clockwise p Flashing O0 08 S205 an SHUTTLE dial SF 7H e M F CLKe BAR 4 counter clockwise M 1 2345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 4 Trim the position at the selected unit digit 5 Press the STOP button or the EXIT NO key The trimmed locate point
88. to capitals Numerals 0 9 gt No conversion Symbols gt No conversion Other symbols gt Under bar is converted to o 9 After inputting a file name press the EXECUTE YES key Save will be executed and the following displayed During save the capacity display will continue to count down For a case where a multiple number of disks are required disks will automatically eject and the next disk must be loaded At completion of save the display returns to the original time base and COMPLETED will light Note If you attempt to save a WAV file with the same name as an existing WAV file on the backup disk Already Exist The same file already exists will be displayed and save cannot be executed For details refer to the later Using a backup disk in which a program is already saved 10 Press the EXIT NO key or STOP button COMPLETED is extinguished WAV FILE WHICH WAS SAVED Composition of WAV file A WAV file on the backup disk is made one file to one track in the root directory for a total of 24 files File names will be from 01 WAV to 24 WAV r is the file name specified in above and numbers 0124 correspond to each track An unrecorded track will be made as one file for Data number zero AHHHHHEO1 WAV fHHHHHEO2 WAV AHHHHHE 24 WAV Composition of WAV file on multiple discs WAV files are saved in order from track 1 through
89. to select programs from the backup disk appears In the default mode New PGM appears so you can create a new program on the backup disk 1 23 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2223 22 97 Fostex Model D2424 Flashing 24 worries HO has CLOCK i INT j If you create a new program and you go to the save menu a p01 indication appears if nothing is saved on the disk The program number flashes if there is data already saved on the disk 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 If data is saved on a backup disk you can turn the JOG dial to select existing program numbers in addition to New PGM or even select Eject Select and save an existing program The current data saved will be erased and overwritten with the new data being saved ALWAYS select New PGM if you do not want to overwrite erase any existing data Select Eject to eject the disk then press the EXECUTE YES key The menu to select the program range appears by selecting Save All Flashing L oi 3 H 8 12 18 24 30 32 1 2345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2223 24 Save All refers to saving all programs from the very first program to the very last program By turning the JOG dial at this time you can select program number 01 02 all the way up to the current program number Reference Manual Saving and Loa
90. to select the Tempo Map Set menu then press the EXECUTE YES key Indication on the display changes as shown below and the current tempo appears The initial setting is 001 bar 1 J 22120 This means that a tempo for the first beat of the first measure is set to 120 oL OL Bm 24 780 BSRaRemecd ULT er HUOM Fs ES LocK iNT Boned 123 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Storing a tempo value You can view the current tempo values in sequence Tempo value bar J J means that no tempo values are specified after the current setting With the initial setting OOlbar 1 7 120 is followed by bar J J 3 Press the EXECUTE YES key The indication changes to 001 measure of 001bar flashes See the figure below This means that you can enter a value now Flashing Bm 24 UON rs TWAS iz clock INT BReonop H fi H t 2 12 3 4 5 6 7 B 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 4 Turn the SHUTTLE dial to move the flashing cursor to the desired edit location and use the JOG dial to enter the bar beat tempo information to be stored The bar and beat settings for the time signatures determine the setting range of bar and beat settings for the tempo You can specify a tempo between 30 and 250 per quarter note The indication J means no tempo which is used to delete a tempo setting When you turn the JOG
91. to the recording Press the UNDO REDO key again to restore the conditions that existed after the recording However the procedures explained here is for Single Undo Redo and there are limitations as written in the Notes below If the current drive was formatted with the multiple undo function ON Multiple Undo is also possible Refer to page 64 for details on the Multiple Undo function lt Notes at executing sigle undo redo gt Note 1 This function only works when this recorder is in the stop mode Note 2 After finishing auto punch in out please note that single Undo Redo is not possible if the following have been executed e If a new recording has been made e When a new editing job is executed such as Copy amp Paste Move amp Paste or Erase e When in the AUTO PUNCH ON mode when the AUTO PUNCH IN point is passed in the PLAY or RECORD mode e If the power was switched off e f program select was executed e When multiple undo is executed FOStex Model D2424 Reference Manual Punch In Out Manual Punch In Out This section explains how to perform Manual Punch In Out using a foot switch optional Model 8051 You do not need to specify the Punch In Out points Instead you press the foot switch at the Punch In Out point Manual Punch In Out also offers rehearsal and actual takes You can repeat rehearsal until you are ready As an example replace a part of the recorded guitar solo on track
92. track 24 When saving on a multiple number of backup disks remaining space is constantly calculated automatically and should the capacity on the track for saving the next WAV file be insufficient the disk is exchanged with the next one Capacity of the WAV file After saving a WAV file in some cases the capacity will increase compared to the current drive capacity For example depending on the status of the recording such as record starting time and ending time or size of the recorded and unrecorded length in some cases capacity will increase For example in the case of a track which is recorded from ABS 0 minute to ABS 1 minute and from ABS 10 minutes to ABS 11 minutes in the current drive it will be 2 minutes file but in the WAV file it will be a file of 11 minutes Also on the unrecorded track capacity will increase as a data zero and a WAV file small capacity will be made 101 When using a backup disc in which a program is already saved If a program is already saved in the backup disk depending on the remaining capacity the following selectable item may be added to the Step 6 Save Method These can be selected by rotating the JOG dial Title amp Eject display The present disk must be removed and return to Step 5 This is selected when another disc is to be used Title amp New PGM display There is enough remaining capacity to make a new WAV file in addition to a WAV f
93. track 3 and so on 1 Enter the SETUP mode while in the stop mode by pressing the SETUP key 2 Select the Track Name Edit display by rotating the JOG dial and then press the EXECUTE YES key As shown below the display will change to selecting the desired track and the track number will flash In the example below 01 in TRK 01 will flash gt gu a 3 3 H n 6 FS i Wes 18 18 p CLOCK E E NTs a El EQUES H 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Flashing PG gt err 2 j H IOM Fs HOU H 8 1 B 18 18 CLOCK 24 24 INT 30 NUS a2 42 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 3 Rotate the JOG dial while 01 is flashing to select the desired track number and press the EXECUTE YES key The flashing number will move to the left end digit to allow input of new letters and symbols In example below will flash Flashing E e Iu WOM es ME Lez rCLOCK Eu 12 H 4 0 2 ELI 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 4 Numbers and symbols can be input at the selected flashing digit by rotating the JOG dial and the flashing digit can be moved with the SHUTTLE dial If the JOG dial is rotated at the edit point letters numbers symbols listed in the following can be input A maximum of 8 digits can be input for a name 74 After input of the desired tr
94. turning the power off to the recorder first quit SETUP mode and make sure that the recorder section is stopped Especially never attempt to turn off the power to the recorder while the hard disk is accessing data the HD ACCESS LED is lit or flashing Otherwise not only will you lose recorded data but you may damage to the recorder FOSTEX is not responsible for the data lost during operation of the recorder Before you change the location of the recorder pack the recorder in the shipping carton or an impactresistant case Make sure that the recorder is kept free from external vibration or impact since the recorder is very sensitive to vibration e Do not install the recorder in locations subject to the following Extremely high or low temperature or significant changes in temperature Excessive humidity or dust Excessive changes in power supply voltage Unstable or significantly vibrating or shaking surfaces Near a strong magnetic field such as a TV or speaker e If you move the recorder from a place with an excessively low temperature to a warm place or if you use the recorder in a room in which the temperature varies significantly during winter condensation may occur on the hard disk or other parts In such cases leave the recorder for about an hour in the new location before you turn on the power Note on repair e This recorder does not use any parts that users can repair easily Contact your
95. 14 04 mmc time Frame rate set 14 06 frame rate Time base set 14 08 time base 133 Fostex Model D2424 Reference Manual MIDI Implementation Chart MMC List Status Request Status request command Status reply Controller to D2424 D2424 to controller Loop op status 22 21 32 21 Loop op mode 12 gt Loop status 22 22 32 22 on off Post locate status 22 28 32 28 lt post locate status gt Auto rec status 22 2D 32 2D lt edit message gt Lock status 22 41 32 41 lt lock status gt Lock mode status 22 42 32 42 lt lock mode gt Copy clip status 22 45 32 45 edit message 01 or 14 gt 32 46 edit message 02 mmc time Copy paste status 22 46 or 32 46 edit message 00 32 47 edit message 02 mmc time Erase status 22 47 Or 32 47 edit message 00 Move clip status 22 4D 32 4D edit message 01 or 14 gt 32 4E edit message 02 mmc time Move paste status 22 4E Or 32 4E edit message 00 gt Digital in ch st 23 41 33 41 channel channel Adat in status 23 41 33 41 channel 7F count mmc track Digital out ch st 23 42 33 42 lt channel gt lt channel gt Adat out status 23 42 33 42 channel 7F channel 0 Program status 23 43 33 43 program Click status 23 44 33 44 on off Level status 23 45 33 45 count 10 level data
96. 2 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 3 F When you press the UNDO REDO key the recorder will undo or redo the operation immediately and Track display 71 of the item to be copied or moved will change to lit display Undo Or Redo and COM PLETED 5 Select a destination track to paste data Note AN selected track S indicator light up This function only works when this recorder is in You can select only mono tracks as the destination of a copied or moved mono track If you copied or moved the stop mode adjacent odd even tracks you can select only adjacent Note odd even tracks as the destination If you do not select any tracks the data will be pasted If you perform one of the following operations back to the copy or move source track after you use the Copy amp Paste or Move and Paste operation the Undo Redo function will no longer 6 Turn the JOG dial to enter the number of repeats be effective Repeat You can enter up to 99 However this is automatically Ifa new recording has been made limited by the available recording source on the disk When a new editing job is executed such as That is if the disk has enough free space you can set up Copy amp Paste Move amp Paste Erase to 99 repeats If the disk has only a small amount of While in the AUTO PUNCH ON mode when free space the JOG dial allows you to set a lower the AUTO PUNCH IN p
97. 3 e Initialize the recorder e Select a desired Program for Punch In Out e Check a sampling frequency of the recorder and external device Preparation 4 Play the guitar accompanying the playback of tracks 1 to 8 Check to see that the guitar is connected to the input The recording level and monitor volume is adjusted on jack of the mixer as required for AUTO PUNCH IN the mixer in the same manner as done for AUTO PUNCH OUT mentioned earlier IN OUT described earlier 1 Connect an optional foot switch Model 8051 to 5 Press the foot switch once at the desired Punch the PUNCH IN OUT jack on the rear panel In point then press the foot switch again at the desired Punch Out point The rehearsal mode will operate as shown in the figure Between the Punch In and Out points the current performance of the guitar will be played as the guitar monitor sound The previous recording is heard in any other case The RECORD LED lights up when Punching In and turn off when Punching Out the REHEARSAL LED remains flashing Start point of Auto Punch In point Auto Punch Out point End point of playback Take In Take Out playback Track8 Track 7 Track6 Track5 r i Track4 2 Set the foot switch function to Punch I O punch Se TS part t changed in out function by the SETUP mode Setup of the m S LUE racl foot switch function menu All tracks are in Only track 3
98. 4 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 EXECUTE YES key It will change to the display for setup of a new program in the current drive Flashing Flashing ES Clock INT 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2223 24 Turning the JOG dial in this state makes it possible to select another program other than the above on the current drive The size of the program appears when the program is selected If you select a program that is already recorded with data and load is executed for the load destination the existing data is deleted while loading takes place If you do not want to overwrite the existing data select New PGM mentioned above prior to loading 3 Press the EXECUTE YES key while SCSI 6 is 5 Press the EXECUTE YES key flashing It will change to the display for selecting the backup number saved in the backup disk Flashing ou B 2 GM Fs HBUS Song data will be loaded to the selected Program If for example backup 1 is started for Program 1 then B01 gt gt P01 MB will appear REMAIN lights up load proceeds and MB program size is counted down when individual programs are loaded When the load operation is complete COMPLETED will light and the recorder will display the Time Base that was shown before the unit entered the Setup mode NE E 6 Press the STOP button or the EXIT NO key When the JOG dial is rotated in addit
99. 45 Refer to APPENDIX Setting the slave type Slave Type Vari 116 O Setting the record protect function Rec Protect Off 116 O Setting digital input tracks D in Analog 117 e Setting digital output tracks D out adat 118 e Setting BAR BEAT resolution mode Resolution Off 119 e Setting the MIDI device ID number Device ID 00 120 9 Setting the operating clock Clock Sel Int 121 o Setting the SYNC preset Sync Preset Available with option Model 8345 Refer to the APPENDIX Setting the Virtual LTC display Virtual LTC Available with option Model 8345 Refer to the APPENDIX Setting the chase offset display Offset Disp Available with option Model 8345 Refer to the APPENDIX Setting the internal clock Date amp Time Set Please refer to the Quick Operation Guide Setting the Auto EE mode Auto EE Mode Off 123 e Setting the Foot switch function Foot SW Punch IO 123 Setting the stop function at the mark point Mark Stop MD Off 124 e Setting the reference level Ref Level 12dB 125 e Setting input output Balance Unbalance BAL UNBAL UNBAL 126 e Setting the drive Drive Sel IDE 129 Setting the display contrast level Contrast Level 6 130 O C Modes applicable program by program They can be saved loaded Modes applicable to all programs They cannot be saved loaded lt Table 2 gt Check menu Check item Display Refer page Community Check of the Event number on the track NOs Of Event 122 Check of the current drive
100. 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Hard disk E IDE connection error The hard disk is not connected correctly 1 2345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Action to take After temporarily saving the data to an external SCSI via the SETUP mode SAVE menu return the data to the recorder by the same SETUP mode LOAD menu The editing number of points will be cleared and you can continue editing Load error indication You cannot load data because the data input to the DATA INPUT connector contains an error 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Action to take Check to see if there is an abnormality with the external digital machine connected to the DATA INPUT connector or cable Try to LOAD again Un formatted indication The internal hard disk is damaged or not formatted yet After this message is shown for about 10 seconds Disk Format in Setup mode will flash on the display gu IOM Fs HBUS Action to take Press and hold down the RECORD button and press the EXECUTE YES key to format the disk All audio and other data on the disk will be lost 1 i ol o 3 H 9 2 a 24 30 42 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Disk error indication This disk cannot be read 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Action to take Contact the Fostex service station as so
101. 9 The data for each program is SAVED or LOADED for each program when the song data is designated for SAVE LOAD in the SETUP mode This data is maintained even when the power is turned OFF Refer to page 54 for more information about the Locate function 23 Rewind button REWIND Pressing this button while the recorder section is stopped will rewind data at 30 times speed Pressing this button in Play mode will cue data you can hear sound while rewinding at five times speed Pressing this button while holding down the STOP button will perform the LOCATE ABS 0 operation and immediately locate the beginning of the Program ABS TIME 00m OOs OOf Refer to the STOP button section for more information about LOCATE ABS 0 24 Undo Redo key UNDO REDO M UNDO If you wish to restore the status prior to editing recording or performing a punch in out take press the UNDO REDO key Pressing the UNDO REDO key again will return you to where you were before you pressed the UNDO REDO key the first time If the current drive you are using has been formatted with the multiple undo function switched ON you can execute multiple undo by pressing this key while holding down the SHIFT key lt Note gt This key is enabled only when the recorder is stopped Refer to pages 41 43 68 and 71 for more information about the single Undo Redo operation Refer to page 64 for more
102. 959511 FAX 39 0541 957404 THE NETHERLANDS gt NAME IEMKE ROOS AUDIO B V ADD Kuiperbergweg 20 1101 AG Amsterdam The Netherlands TEL 31 20 697 2121 FAX 31 20 697 4201 lt NORWAY gt NAME Siv Ing Benum A S ADD P O Box 145 Vinderen 0319 Oslo 3 Norway TEL 47 22 139900 FAX 47 22 148259 lt PORTUGAL gt NAME Caius Tecnologias Audio e Musica Lda ADD Rua de Santa Catarina 131 4000 Porto Portugal TEL 351 2 2086009 2001394 FAX 351 2 2054760 2087488 lt SPAIN gt NAME Multitracker S A ADD C Garcilaso No 9 Madrid 28010 Spain TEL 34 91 4470700 91 4470898 FAX 34 91 5930716 lt SWEDEN gt NAME Professional Television AB ADD Kavallerivagen 24 172 48 Sundbyberg Sweden TEL 46 8 59798000 FAX 46 8 59798001 lt SWITZERLAND gt NAME Audio Bauer Pro AG ADD Bernerstrasse Nord 182 CH 8064 Zurich Switzerland TEL 41 1 4323230 FAX 41 1 4326558 lt UK gt NAME SCV London ADD 3A 6 24 Southgate Road London N1 3JJ England UK TEL 44 171 923 1892 FAX 44 171 241 3644 FOSTEX CORPORATION 3 2 35 Musashino Akishima shi Tokyo Japan 196 0021 FOSTEX CORPORATION OF AMERICA 15431 Blackburn Ave Norwalk CA 90650 U S A PRINTED IN JAPAN AUG 2000 8288 466 000 FX
103. ARD IN point for the Copy or Move operation You can locate a stored CLIPBOARD IN point If you press the CLIPBOARD IN key while holding down the SHIFT key when the recorder is stopped you can preview the fade in part at the stored CLIPBOARD IN point Refer to page 66 for copying moving data Refer to page 54 for locating the CLIPBOARD IN point Refer to page 62 for previewing data at the CLIPBOARD IN point 6 Clipboard Out key CLIPBOARD OUT PREVIEW This key is used to store and recall the Out point CLIPBOARD OUT point for the Copy or Move operation You can locate a stored CLIPBOARD OUT point If you press the CLIPBOARD OUT key while holding down the SHIFT key when the recorder is stopped you can preview the fade out part at the stored CLIPBOARD OUT point Refer to page 54 for locating the CLIPBOARD OUT point Refer to page 66 for copying moving data Refer to page 62 for previewing data at the CLIPBOARD OUT point 7 Auto Return Start key AUTO RTN START PREVIEW This key is used to store and recall the start point AUTO RTN START point for the Auto Return or Auto Repeat operation You can locate a stored AUTO RTN START point If you press the AUTO RTN START key while holding down the SHIFT key when the recorder is stopped you can preview the fade in part at the stored AUTO RTN START point Refer to page 54 for locating the AUTO RTN
104. ART key the AUTO PUNCH OUT key or CLIPBOARD IN key AUTO RTN START key CLIPBOARD IN ke Bere O AUTO RTN e O AUTO PLAY IN OUT START IN OUT END fr a 1l Em 3 N NE NB E NH k PREVIEW 5 4 CHARACTER gt EDIT SETUP UNDO REDO PREV NEXT mm ewe a Fe SHIFT UAC READY J C TCGEN J MUNDO PREVTC CNEXTTC SHIFT key lt Display indication during the Preview operation gt Memory data B IF SF CODE SLES 1 ie 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 During operation the meter display will light up from left to right p gt Pr Pr Pr Pe PP PP PP PP PP PP PP PP d Approx 2sec 1 sec mute playback 1 sec normal playback The sound rises at the memory point The recorder repeats playback the rise sound at the locate point edit point As shown in the diagram one second of data prior to the locate point is muted during playback The mute is off fade in at the locate point and the sound is played back for one second The recorder will repeat this operation until you quit the Preview function 62 Previewing the fall of the sound fade out While holding down the SHIFT key press the AUTO END START key the AUTO PUNCH IN key or the CLIPBOARD OUT key AUTO PUNCH IN key CLIPBOARD OUT key AUTO RTN END key O AUTO RTN SEEN eee
105. AY STOP F FWD or REW mode locate will be executed to the one previous memory point When inputting character in the title edit mode this serves as a character short cut function The memory number selecting during display of Press LOCATE the memory number can be reverted with each press of this key 19 Jog Shuttle dial Jog dial inside Turning the JOG dial while the recorder is stopped performs digital scrubbing in either direction which allows you to check the audio and locate a point without any change in pitch The JOG dial is also used to change values in the data edit mode or when the pitch data is displayed It also allows you to select a parameter to set in Setup mode Shuttle dial outside FWD and REW direction shuttle operation in the STOP mode is possible at 1 64 times fast winding in the no sound state On the other hand FWD and REW direction shuttle operation in the PLAY mode is possible in the CUE playback mode at 1 8 and 1 7 times speed while cueing In addition while in the display edit mode the editing point can be moved Refer to page 50 for more information about the editing the memory data Refer to page 105 for more information about SETUP mode Refer to page 60 for more information about Digital Scrubbing 14 20 Vari pitch key VARI PITCH P EDIT Use this key to turn the Vari pitch function on and off When this function is enabled the co
106. After Select Chain No is displayed the first number in the present chain play list will flash and the program and its title will be displayed Flashing 1 23 4 5 6 7 B 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2223 24 59 2 Select the desired program with the JOG dial and press the EXECUTE YES key The sequence number currently set in the chain list can be selected by rotating the JOG dial The program title in selected order will be simultaneously displayed After selection when the EXECUTE YES key is pressed the D2424 will locate to the AUTO RTN START point of the selected program 3 Start playback by pressing the PLAY button Chain play will be execute in compliance to the currently set Chain Play MD mode lt Note gt You cannot record or edit in the chain play mode It will only play back the program set in the chain play list FOStex Model D2424 Reference Manual Cue amp Review Function Cue amp Heview Function This chapter explains how to use the Cue amp Review function with the REWIND button the F FWD button and the SHUTTLE dial and also explains Digital Scrubbing with the envelope function During Cue Review and Digital Scrubbing you will hear the sound recorded on the disk which makes it easy for you to swiftly locate the desired point without failure while listening to the sounds be executed in any time base To execute this function with a non
107. BO1 will be attached to all of the backup disks For this reason on the disk after it has been saved it is recommended to clearly Loading the data using SCSI Here you are loading on the current drive the data of each program saved on the backup purpose SCSI disk The prerequisite is that a backup SCSI drive is connected to the recorder Load the data saved on one removable disk Load the program with the Load PGM menu in the SETUP mode e Input format available adat SPDIF SCSI IDE2 When using a SCSI IDE2 41 48 or 49 56 When using a SCSI IDE2 e Programs available When using an adat SPDIF PO1 P99 each program individually e Track available When using an adat or DAT gt Tracks 1 8 1 16 1 24 1 32 1 40 1 48 1 56 9 16 9 24 9 32 9 40 9 48 9 56 17 24 17 32 17 40 17 48 17 56 25 32 25 40 25 48 25 56 33 40 33 48 33 56 gt PO1 P99 or All program gt All tracks 1 56 will be automatically selected 1 Press the SETUP key 4 Select the backup number and press the The recorder will enter the SETUP mode 2 Use the JOG dial to select Load PGM and press the EXECUTE YES key An indication of the type of the digital signal to be loaded will flash on the display 2 a H uo ss 8 We 4 CLOCK INT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 DIGITAL Flashing oL OL gm 24 IOM Fs D Lwe Cock p 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 1
108. BTRACT OE GP 6 READ WRITE MOVE ADD SUBTRACT OF GP 7 READ WRITE MOVE ADD SUBTRACT 48 MOTION CONTROL TALLY READ 4C RECORD MODE READ WRITE 4E TRACK RECORD STATUS READ 4F TRACK RECORD READY READ WRITE MASKED WRITE 51 RECORD MONITOR READ WRITE Inquiry Message List IDENTITY REQUEST FO 7E channel 06 01 F7 IDENTITY REPLY FO 7E channel 06 02 51 01 00 12 00 01 00 7F 7F F7 51 Fostex ID 01 00 Device family code 12 00 Device family number D2424 01 00 7F 7F Software version 132 Model D2424 Reference Manual MIDI Implementation Chart MMC List FOSt X Fostex MIDI System Exclusive Message Format for D2424 Note Following protocol is effective only in equipment which will reply by Identity Reply FO 7E lt channel gt 06 02 51 01 00 12 00 01 OO 7F 7F F7 against the Inquiry Message FO 7E lt channel gt 06 01 Fostex System Exclusive Message General Structure FO 51 device id sub id 1 gt lt data gt F7 Numbers are all expressed in hexadecimal units Table sub id 1 data Command or Model Set Controller to D2424 Acknowledge or Status D2424 to Controller Loop on off 12 22 on off Post locate 12 28 post locate mode Auto rec 12 2D on off 32 2D edit message Lock enable 12 41 lock enable Lock mode 12 42 lock mode Copy clip 12 45 cou
109. Base OL Bm 24 JOM Fs i HBUS i 8 CLOCK 1 D Flashing e L BIT 24 m HB cLock INT 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 3 With the JOG dial choose either IDE1 IDE2 or SCSI you want 129 Fostex Model D2424 Reference Manual Changing the Initial Setting SETUP mode Setup of the display contrast level Contrast menu The contrast level of the D2424 display can be setup Because this setup content will be registered in the D2424 internal System ROM it will be held even though the current drive hard disk is replaced Initial setting Level 6 Range which can be setup Level 0 Level 12 Can be set in one step increments Setup content can be saved loaded as song data Setting the contrast level 1 While the recorder is stopped press the SETUP 3 Select the desired contrast level by rotating the key to enter SETUP mode JOG dial then press the EXECUTE YES key The contrast level can be selected in the 0 12 range 2 Turn the JOG dial to select Contrast After selecting the selected drive will be setup by flashes then press the EXECUTE YES key pressing the EXECUTE YES key The display will change as shown below and the currently setup contrast level will be displayed Initial setting is 4 Exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the EXIT 06 NO key or STOP button The flashing will
110. D LED lights up The rewind direction review speed variates from 1 8 during the cue process times speed depending on the degree angle of turning the dial PLAY LED flashes and REWIND LED lights up 3 Adjust the monitor sound of the track to monitor on the during the review process mixer 6 Let go of the SHUTTLE dial to return to normal play speed Digital scrubbing using the envelope function You may perform digital scrubbing using the Envelope Function of the recorder while the recorder is stopped The envelope function allows digital scrubbing for each track recorded The display will show the envelope indication of the track selected 60 Model D2424 Reference Manual Cue amp Review Function FOStex 1 While the recorder section is stopped depress the SHIFT key and then press the RECORD TRACK select key of the desired record track This turns ON the envelope function The envelope indication of the selected track will appear on the display The following example shows the indication of track 4 envelope after RECORD TRACK select key 4 12 20 is pressed At this time the recorder is in the STILL status scrub mode is in still status and the REWIND LED and F FWD lights up Playback point time L ol 0 3 6 9 12 18 24 30 42 Playback point Track indication 2 You can use the JOG dial to digitally scrub the performance of the track selected The envelope of the performance recorde
111. DAT adat or SCSI device to clear enough space on the internal hard disk to make new recordings Also in addition to save load by FMDS 3 Ver 3 save load in WAV file is also possible and the saved data transferred to a computer for editing Furthermore by installing the optional Model 9044 BAY CADDY in D2424 it becomes possible to install an E IDE hard disk for backup purpose or the Model 9046 DVD RAM drive and in the same way and save load by FMDS 3 Ver 3 0 or WAV file can be realized About saved and loaded data The data format and time required to SAVE LOAD song data will vary between saving and loading with a DAT using S P DIF digital signals saving and loading with an adat device using adat digital signals or saving and loading with a SCSI device IDE2 E IDE hard disk or optional DVD RAM drive S PDIF digital signal You can save and load each Program individually Following about five seconds of pilot signal shown in the diagram below song data in the current drive is output to a connected DAT Two tracks of audio data shown in black in the diagram are output To save data from Real tracks 1 24 two track data will be output twelve times which takes twelve as much time as the song duration ABS 0 to REC END To save all data including Additional tracks 1 56 two track data will be output twenty eight times which takes twenty eight times the song duration Saved data is also loaded two tracks at
112. E TO RAIN OR MOISTURE S A ETY l N ST R U CTI O N S 9 Heat The appliance should be situated away from heat sources Such as radiators heat registers stoves or other appliances 1 Read Instructions All the safety and operating instructions including amplifiers that produce heat should be read before the appliance is operated 10 Power Sources The appliance should be connected to a power 2 Retain Instructions The safety and operating instructions supply only of the type described in the operating instructions or should be retained for future reference as marked on the appliance 3 Heed Warnings All warnings on the appliance and in the 11 Grounding or Polarization The precautions that should be taken operating instructions should be adhered to so that the grounding or polarization means of an appliance is 4 Follow Instructions All operating and use instructions should not defeated be followed 12 Power Cord Protection Power supply cords should be routed 5 Water and Moisture The appliance should not be used near so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items water for example near a bathtub washbowl kitchen sink placed upon or against them paying particular attention to cords laundry tub in a wet basement or near a swimming pool and at plugs convenience receptacles and the point where they the like exit from the appliance 6 Carts and Stands The appliance should be used only with a 13 Clea
113. EED HERE SS eb e aE EA RATEN aeii 141 MainteriariC8 5 enne terret ER re Hane oed Ebr A E A EA AA cus teen sa dri eere A oct 143 Sleep V M 143 APPENDIX Operational manual for the recorder with the Model 8345 TC SYNC card installed 3 It uses an E IDE hard disk as the recording media Model D2424 Reference Manual Main features Precautions FOSUOX Main features The unit s recorder section uses a recording format called FDMS 3 Ver 3 0 Fostex Disk Management System A removable cartridge for easy installation and replacement of the hard disk at the front panel is employed By installing the optional Model 9044 BAY CADDY an E IDE hard disk for backup can then be installed Furthermore it will also be possible to install the optional Model 9046 DVD RAM drive The recorder features non destructive audio editing a great advantage of digital recording such as Copy amp Paste Move amp Paste Erase etc You can choose Time Base ABS or MTC or MIDI bar beat clock as the recorder It contains the Track exchange function to allow exchanges between real tracks or between real track and the additional track A Preview function allows for an intuitive fine adjustment of an editing point locate point Single undo redo for reprocessing record edit mistakes and Multiple undo by time jump is possible On off can be set when formatting A Vari Pitch function
114. ETUP mode FOStex Time Signature Setting Signature Set Using the Setting a time signature menu you can set a time signature of a given measure on the internal programmable Tempo Map And also in this setting the BAR 002bar 12 OOclk displayed at the head of the disk in the time base BAR BEAT CLK can be set within the range of 009bar 002bar For example you can specify 4 4 for the first and second measures and 2 2 from the third measure Setting a time signature and tempo will create a Tempo Map which allows the recorder to manage a song using the BAR BEAT CLK Time Base You can also use the Metronome function A time signature and tempo setting are required when MIDI clock amp song position pointer are output to an external sequencer P nitial Setting 001bar 4 4 beat Available bars 001 999 Maximum setting points 64 The setting is applicable song by song Available time signature 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 1 8 3 8 5 8 6 8 7 8 8 8 Delete The setting can be saved or loaded as a part of the song data The setting is memorized even when the power is off Make sure you choose the right program before setting this mode Storing a time signature 1 Select a Program for which to set a time signature Refer to Using the Program Change function on page 36 for information on selecting a Program 2 Press the SETUP key use the JOG dial to select the
115. EXECUTE YES key press press the STOP button or the EXIT NO key Each time you press one of these keys the recorder returns to the previous hierarchy level of the menu and finally exits SETUP mode and displays the previous Time Base Setup of the stop function at the mark point Mark Stop MD menu At the Setup of the stop function at the mark point menu this sets whether or not D2424 should automati cally stop at the preset mark point locate point during playback Initial setting Off e Option OFF or On This setting is shared by all Programs in the same disk The settings cannot be saved and loaded as part of the song data The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the recorder Setting the stop function at the mark point 3 Select On or Off with the JOG dial and press 1 While the recorder is stopped press the SETUP key to enter SETUP mode 2 Turn the JOG dial to select Mark Stop MD flashes then press the EXECUTE YES key A flashing will extinguish by pressing the EXECUTE YES key and the stop function at the mark point information that was lit will being flashing Initial setting it will show Off E E 2 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 the EXECUTE YES key again The selected stop function will be registered and the Step 2 will return to flashing 4 Exit from the SETUP mode by pressi
116. Exchange in 8 track units Note You cannot record data on Additional tracks in real time Also you cannot play back data on Additional tracks as is in real time If you wish to play back data on an Additional track first use the Track Exchange function to move the data to a Real track Also you need to move the data to a Real track if you wish to check the REC END point of a song on an Additional track Refer to page 72 for more information on the Track Exchange function Note Track composition of a D2424 formatted in 96kHz 24bit or 88 2kHz 24bit will be 8 Real Tracks 48 Additional Tracks Note Data on the Additional tracks also affects the REMAIN value If Real tracks contain no data but Additional tracks contain data the amount of data time and space will be reflected in the REMAIN value Note If the record time of the data existing on the additional track is longer than the data on the real track and all tracks are saved on an external DAT or adat then the data of the additional track can only be saved for the time equal to the real track and the remaining data is not saved This is because the ABS 0 to REC END of the real track is automatically recognized and saved There is a need to exchange the track using the track exchange function in this case as well Fostex Model D2424 Reference Manual Before Starting Input monitoring and playback monitoring There are two met
117. GITAL IN a digital loop will be created and it will not operate correctly In such a case setup the D2424 Setup of the digital input to adat or Async asynchronous mode of S P DIF Fostex Model D2424 Reference Manual Recording to a Metronome Sound Recording to a Metronome Sound This chapter explains how to record your performance while you are playing an instrument accompanied by a metronome based on the time signature and tempo specified in the Tempo Map The metronome sound is output from track 24 on the D2424 e Initialize the recorder before the operation e If multiple Programs exist first select the desired Program Notes With the metronome function ON and the RECORD TRACK select key for the track track 24 to which the metronome sound is to be output set to READY an attempt to record you cannot record to this track Also information which had already been recorded on this track cannot be played back Always switch off the Metronome function setting in the SETUP mode after finishing Please remember this In D2424 which had been formatted to 96kHz 24bit or 88 2kHz 24bit Real track 1 8 the metronome sound will be output from track 24 Therefore Real tracks 1 8 can all be used for normal recording playback When using the analog mixer ERR BH rowers QOO Q Q GO Qe qe OOo ew ocqwvodoqqe Analog Mixer When using the digital mixer SOOO G G G G O G O
118. IN value is calculated on a mono track basis That value indicates the available recording time and space if you record on one mono track For example if you wish to know how much you can record on eight tracks you need to divide the current REMAIN value by eight The REMAIN value display is calculated from data on the real track and data on the additional track which will be explained later and includes data left over for multiple undo In other words the REMAIN value will be displayed in the form of time capacity obtained by deducting data on the real track data moved onto the additional track and past editing data left over for multiple undo As described in Managing the song by Program the recorder can set up as many as 99 Programs on the disk Setting up a Program requires a small amount of disk space In other words disk space is used not only for storing recorded data but also for storing all setup data Therefore make sure that you have enough space on the disk before you start recording to avoid running out of space the OVER message flashes in that case Fostex Model D2424 Reference Manual Before Starting Managing songs by Program Change function The recorder features Program Select function which enables you to set up to 99 Programs on the disk When you format a disk one Program will be automatically created on the disk You may create more Programs if necessary You may also delete unnecessary
119. Locate by specifying a voluntary time and Locate specifying a voluntary Locate Number 01 99 as well as Locate directly to the recording end point in a Program REC END An application of he Locate function includes auto functions such as Auto Play Auto Return and Auto Repeat Direct Locate The Direct Locate function enables you to locate the following points Locate the beginning of the Program LOCATE ABS 0 Press the REWIND button while holding down the STOP button The recorder will immediately locate the beginning of the currently selected Program new LJ RECORD Wsror pe PLAY LJ PF wo LJ Locate the recording end point of the Program LOCATE REC END Press the F FWD button while holding down the STOP button The recorder will immediately locate the end point of the currently selected Program LI Pm Play LJ new L Locate the position stored in one of the memory keys Press the desired memory key then press the LOCATE key The recorder will locate the point edit point stored in the corresponding memory key immediately O AUTERA AUTO RTN AUTO PUNCH O AUTO PLAY IN START IN our E D00 Ga C PREVIEW SHIFT CLIPBOARD ou O vari PITCH EDIT SETUP UNDO REDO D E E93 IG READY TC GEN MUNDO AUTO REHEARSAL
120. MC MTC must be activated Setup of external equipment Sequence software is setup as follows Set for output of MTC Set frame rate of the MTC to be output Confirm start time of the tune Refer to Owners Manual of the respective equipment for details Setup of the unit 1 Set to same frame rate as the sequence software by the SETUP mode MTC Frame rate setting Refer to page 113 SETUP mode MTC Frame rate setting for operating procedure and details 2 Set to the desired mode by the SETUP mode MTC offset mode setting Refer to page 115 SETUP mode MTC offset mode setting for operating procedure and details 3 A random offset time can be set by the SETUP mode MTC offset time setting Refer to page 114 SETUP mode MTC offset time setting for operating procedure and details 4 Press the EXECUTE YES key holding down the SHIFT key set the slave mode to On 83 FOStex Model D2424 Reference Manual MIDI Sync Function 5 Set slave type to Vari by the SETUP mode Slave type setting Refer to page 116 SETUP mode Slave type setting for operating procedure and details 6 Press the DISP SEL key while holding down the SHIFT key to change the time base display to MTC Precautions at MTC related setups The position ABS O or OO1BAR 1BEAT OOCLK when the setup MTC MTC offset time should be output w
121. Model D2424 Reference Manual Changing the Initial Setting SETUP mode Clock Sel D in setting setting Int Auto Word Video Mid pnis clock from When receiving word clock from T the recorder automati WORD IN the recorder synchro clock received ce wore I cally synchronizes to the incom nizes to the incoming clc while from WORD IN the I Nodo is referenced to the ing clock while the DIGITAL and the DIGITAL and EXT indicators SPDIF Async internal clock When the recorder EXT indicators light in the display light in the display receives correct digital signals the no clock DIGITAL indicator lights in the When no word clock is received When no word clock is received the received from display the recorder is referenced to the EXT indicator flashes showing that WORD IN internal clock while the EXT in the recorder cannot be locked Available only wh dicator flashes ye only when installing the op clock received Regardless of receiving or not receiving word clock from WORD IN the recorder synchronizes to the tional Model 8345 from WORD IN external S P DIF digital signal When the recorder receives correct digital signals the DIGITAL and TC SYNC card If SPDIF Sync Mho clock EXT indicators light in the display When Digital In is set to a SYNC mode if you try to select Clock you try to select received from Sel menu The display
122. RD IN OUT points refer to Registering of the locate point editing point on page 54 100 5 Select OFF and press the EXECUTE YES key The display will change to selecting the program for saving Flashing L 2 18 24 30 E 1 23 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 6 Select the desired program with the JOG dial and press the EXECUTE YES key The display will change to selecting the track to be saved In the initial state All Trk will flashes Flashing oL 3 gos 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 If the JOG dial is rotated at this stage in addition to All Trk flashing 01 01 flashing 56 56 flashing can be selected This function is used when specifying any desired track and saving it Flashing L or o 3 H 8 2 18 24 30 E 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 For example if tracks 5 24 must be saved 05 05 is selected Then proceed to the following 7 After selecting the track press the EXECUTE YES key If All Trk or any desired track was selected the display will change to the following When All Trk is selected The display will change to making a new WAV file on the disk and SURE will flashes Flashing 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 When the JOG dial is rotated Eject can be selected To eject the disk sele
123. RE flashes EXT and DIGITAL will light up and SURE will flash in the display Flashing E BEN it 1 23 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Lit I Notes e If digital signal is being input correctly a DIGITAL and EXT indicator will light up on the display If the DIGITAL and EXT indicator flashes check the connection cabling and the settings of the recorder and the external device The FS indication will flash and warn you if the sampling frequency of the recorder and DAT vary when loading with S P DIF digital signals Be careful when setting the sampling frequency for adat digital signals because there will be no FS warning though there may be a discrepancy 9 Press the EXECUTE YES key again Start Player Start playing the recorder appears on the display Flashing DIGITAL 10 Play the corresponding external device DAT or adat The load operation starts when the recorder accepts the incoming digital signal The time required for the load operation appears on the display and starts counting down Two tracks are loaded at a time from a DAT machine in the following order Track 1 and 2 3 and 4 etc from a DAT machine Eight tracks are loaded each time in the order of Track 1 8 9 16 etc 11 When the load operation is complete COMPLETED flashes on the display 12 Press the STOP button or the EXIT NO key to quit Setup mode The
124. START point Refer to page 66 for copying moving data Refer to page 62 for previewing data at the AUTO RTN START point 8 Auto Punch In key AUTO PUNCH IN PREVIEW This key is used to store and recall the recording start point AUTO PUNCH IN point for the Auto Punch IN OUT operation This point is also used as an erase point You can locate a stored AUTO PUNCH IN point If you press the AUTO PUNCH IN key while holding down the SHIFT key when the recorder is stopped you can preview the fade out part at the stored AUTO PUNCH IN point 12 Refer to page 39 for more information about Auto Punch In Out recording Referto page 66 for more information about pasting data Refer to page 70 for more information about the Erase operations Refer to page 62 for previewing data at the AUTO PUNCH IN point 9 Auto Punch Out key AUTO PUNCH OUT PREVIEW This key is used to store and recall the recording end point AUTO PUNCH OUT point for the Auto Punch IN OUT operation This point is also used as an erase point You can locate a stored AUTO PUNCH OUT point If you press the AUTO PUNCH OUT key while holding down the SHIFT key when the recorder is stopped you can preview the fade in part at the stored AUTO PUNCH OUT point Refer to page 39 for more information about Auto Punch In Out recording Refer to page 70 for more information about the Erase operation
125. Signature Set menu then press the EXECUTE YES key The indication changes to the current time signature appears The initial setting is OOlbar 4 47 4 4 for the first measure 24 wor Fs FO we Lock Nr 30 mm 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 At this time rotating the JOG dial clockwise enables you to check the current time signatures in sequence With the initial setting time signatures after the first measure are all bar This means that a time signature of 4 4 applies to all measures 3 Press the EXECUTE YES key The indication changes to 001 measure of OO1bar 4 4 3 flashes You can enter any time signature here Flashing 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Rotate the JOG dial to enter the desired measure number If you wish to keep the initial setting for the first measure enter 002 If you try to enter any number other than 001 the time signature indicator shows 7 This means that no time signature is set for any measures other than the first measure To change the time signature for the first measure follow the steps below without entering any other measure number Turn the SHUTTLE dial to display flashing of 4 and enter the time signature using the JOG dial The following measure numbers and time signatures
126. Storing a Locate Point Edit Point FOSteX 3 Select the LOCATE number desired using the JOG dial LOCATE number from 00 99 are selectable However select a number other then 00 4 Next press the LOCATE key The time base or bar beat clock put on hold is stored as data in the LOCATE number selected The system will return to the original time base when the storage process is completed and playback is resumed 5 After completing the store process press the STOP button to stop the recorder section Edit and re store data that is already stored d Y Please remember this e f you set BAR BEAT Resolution mode in SETUP mode to ON the recorder will round off the CLK value of the captured bar beat clock value That is the locate point will be at the beginning of the beat 00 Refer to page 119 for more information e When pressing the STORE key in step 2 if the STORE key is pressed while holding down the SHIFT key data to be registered will be held and be confirmed To register data after confirmation press the STORE key again and press the desired memory key RECALL the desired time data already stored in the LOCATE key edit that data and re store it 1 Press the RECALL key while the recorder is stopped The menu to select the LOCATE number will appear Flashing firn 3 oon uu uo J ouu 8 m A M rs LI Las CLOCK INT 2 Turn the JOG dial to select the
127. T connector will function as explained below When recording S P DIF digital signals When recording adat digital signals DAT INPUT 1 8 only can be used DATA INPUT 1 8 9 16 17 24 can all be used By setting the SETUP mode Setup of digital in By setting the SETUP mode Setup of digital in puts to SPDIF Async or SPDIF sync S P DIF puts to adat Async or adat Sync adat digi digital signals that are input to DATA INPUT 1 8 tal signals input to each input connector will be will be assigned to tracks 1 and 2 of the D2424 assigned to each track of the D2424 Tracks 1 2 Tracks 17 24 Tracks 9 16 Tracks 1 8 f C INPUT 24 17 16 9 24 17 e 6 Hau adat digital signal Important Be sure to input a digital signal S PDIF or adat of the same sampling frequency as that used on the recorder Note Connecting the recorder to an external digital device via both digital input and output jacks may generate a digital loop S P DIF digital signal f the connected external device has only a COAXIAL RCA pin jack for digital output use an optional Fostex COP 1 96k optical coaxial converter 44 Model D2424 Reference Manual Recording Digital Data Fostex Selecting a recording Program n 1 If you already have multiple Programs select the desired Program using the Program Select function See page 35 for more information on the Program Se
128. TE YES key again Save Trk 1 24 1 is flashing appears on the display and you can select tracks to save 8 Select the desired track range using the JOG dial You can select 1 9 17 25 33 41 and 49 of the points that are flashing left Use the SHUTTLE dial to move the flashing cursor to the left then turn the JOG dial to select 8 16 24 32 40 48 and 56 Note Refer to the Note on page 85 prior to saving data including the additional track 9 Press the EXECUTE YES key Start Recorder Start recording on the recorder appears on the display and SURE flashes Flashing CT Fs m EIOS CLOCK INT 123 45 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 10 Confirm that the external device is syncing with the digital input signal and start recording on the external device DAT or adat Setting a START ID DAT or a locate point at the recording start point will facilitate future loading operations 11 Confirm that the recording on the external device has started and press the EXECUTE YES key The save operation starts and the time required for the save operation appears on the display and a few seconds later it will start counting down This few seconds delay is due to the pilot signal which is recorded to mark the beginning of the Program to facilitate future load operation Therefore the actual save operation starts when counting down starts Two tracks ar
129. UP mode Tempo Map Set Disk Optimize Reserved wm Date amp Time Set um Reserved lt Note gt Although titles of the Ref TC menu Offset Disp menu Virtual LTC menu and Sync Preset menu will Track name Edit Click 4 i i Delete PGM Signature Set Title Edit Pete FO Disk Format Reserved c T E title of the SETUP menu appears You can select A different menu via the JOG dial Selecting a menu via the JOG dial will move the This indicates the position of the SETUP menu flashing cursor 2 Select the desired menu using the JOG dial then press the EXECUTE YES key The recorder displays the second hierarchy level of the selected SETUP menu where you can set parameters Midi Sync Out 2 MTG offset Offset Mode Preroll Time Frame Rate Ref TC Slave Type moD mm D out er Eoo o Save PGM T Device ID Load PGM lock Sel Drive Sel a BAL UNBAL Mark Stop MD Chain Play Auto EE mode bird Drive Info Contrast Ref Level Chain Play List gt Offset Disp Virtual LTC NOs Of Event Foot SW also be displayed these menus will only function when an optional Model 8345 TC SYNC card is installed Refer to the APPENDIX for details Reserve is the extra position for future extension of the SETUP mode menu 106 Model D2424 Reference Manual Changing the Initial Settings S
130. When specified as sign 00 and sigd 00 signature data of that bar position will be deleted Also bar2 bar1 bar0 sign sigd 00 indicates no corresponding data such as when a figure specified by event number do not exist at receiving the signature map request bar2 bar1 barO beat tmp2 tmp1 tmpO bar2 The 100th digit of the bar figure is expressed in BCD barl The 10th digit of the bar figure is expressed in BCD bar0 The 1 digit of the bar figure is expressed in BCD beat The beat figure is expressed in BCD tmp2 Numerator of the tempo to be set is expressed in BCD tmp1 Denominator of the tempo to be set is expressed in BCD tmpO The 1 digit of the tempo is expressed in BCD When specified as tmp2 tmp1 tmp0 00 tempo data of that bar and meter position will be deleted Also bar2 bar1 barO sign sigd 00 indicates no corresponding data such as when a figure specified by event number do not exist at receiving the signature map request When one data registered by signature map and tempo set map is declared as one event the number of events from head of the tune the umpteenth event counted from head of the tune must be specified event number 00 gt is the first event 00 OFF 01 CLK MIDI CLOCK 02 MTC This corresponds to MIDI SYNC OUT of the SETUP menu Will be composed of two bytes Q P Q 0qqqqqqq binary gt vari data qqqqqqqppppppp A 14 bit data of XO 1 P Oqqqqqagq binary
131. YES key turns off the flashing 2 character and setting of the digital output signal flashes With the initial setting adat flashes as shown below 9 8 a HEEFETRTR i HEU EH ocx f Snr E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Flashing 3 While the adat is flashing turn the JOG dial SPDIF can be selected in addition to adat Select adat if the adat digital signal 8 tracks is to be output and SPDIF if the S P DIF digital signal 2 tracks is to be output 4 After selecting the digital output signal press the EXECUTE YES key The selected digital output signal will be registered and the flashing in Step 2 will return to flashing To cancel the operation or to restore the setting obtained prior to the EXECUTE YES key press press the STOP button or the EXIT NO key Each time you press one of these keys the recorder returns to the previous hierarchy level of the menu and finally exits SETUP mode and displays the previous Time Base Setting BAR BEAT resolution mode Resolution menu The Setting BAR BEAT resolution mode menu enables you to turn BAR BEAT resolution mode on and off The initial setting is Off When you turn this mode on the CLK clock digits will be always round off to 00 and be stored in the memory key while the recorder is using the BAR BEAT CLK Time Base That is beat resolution is u
132. a new data is registered at the bar position where a data exists the former data will be written over When this command is re ceived this equipment will reply with 34 01 edit message Upon completing the registeration edit message will reply with 01 completed or with 10 over value error if registeration is attempted at a non existing point or an errone ous figure is used 14 02 tempo set map Tempo set command The command for tempo set of this equipment If a new data is registered in a bar meter where data already exists the former data will be written over When this command is received this equipment will reply with 34 02 edit message gt Upon completing the registeration edit message will reply with 01 completed or with 10 over value error if registeration is attempted at a non existing point or an erroneous figure is used 14 03 Tempo map all erase command When this command is received this equipment will erase all meter and tempo data in the current program and thus return 139 Fostex Model D2424 Reference Manual MIDI Implementation Chart MMC List it to the default state meter 4 4 tempo 2 120 Also when this command is received this equipment will reply with 34 03 edit message Upon completing the registeration edit message will reply with 01 completed or with 10 over value error if registeration is attempted at a non existing point or an erron
133. a small amount of single track data is written in many different sections on the disk the maximum number of events may be reached To avoid this event number overflow you need to check the number of events for each track The recorder provides an event check menu in Setup mode for this purpose lt Notes on digital recording gt During analog recording O files are not created since silence does not create data 0 However during S P DIF and adat digital recording the recorder records data O0 this is called mute recording When one second of consecutive data O is input to the recorder it creates a O file and limits the consumption of disk space However repeating this operation will eventually increase the number of events leading to event number overflow What is an event As shown in the diagram below the number of events can be eleven or more if partial recordings are made This is because an unrecorded part is regarded as an event and a recorded part is also regarded as an event s The duration of each event can vary from 740 msec to 23 hours 59 minutes 59 seconds FS 44 1kHz ABS 0 REC END ABS 23h 59m Event Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 O Recorded part shortest 740 msec FS 44 1kHz Unrecorded part shortest 740 msec FS 44 1kHz An unrecorded part zero file is always regarded as one even regardless of its duration However a recorded part can consist of a grou
134. ack name press the EXECUTE YES key By pressing the EXECUTE YES key the D2424 will change to the track number selecting display the same as in Step 2 Track number will flash If you wish to continue registering track names repeat lt Step 3 gt and lt Step 4 gt Upon completing registering of the track names press the EXIT NO key to exit from the SETUP mode Model D2424 Reference Manual MIDI Sync Function FOStex MIDI Sync Function The following are examples concerning general types of systems using MIDI related functions contained in the recorder MIDI clock sync system By setting any desired meter at any desired point of the programmable tempo map contained in the recorder and by output of a MIDI clock and song position pointer according to the setting a hardware type MIDI sequencer can be synchronized as a MIDI clock slave Consequently in this system the recorder will be the master and the MIDI sequencer the slave Restore the default settings on this recorder Check for the correct program and proper sampling frequency MIDI IN eS MIDI Sequencer m m MIDI OUT
135. al to select a type of digital signal adat or SPDIF format to be used for the save operation Selecting adat will save data in the adat digital signal format Selecting SPDIF will save data in the S P DIF digital signal format 4 Press the EXECUTE YES key Selection of the digital signal format for the save operation will be confirmed and the existing Program numbers will flash on the display Flashing ot Bm 24 3 UOM Fs DOLI 2 D 18 CLOCK 24 x INT 42 123 45 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 5 Rotate the JOG dial to select a Program to save You can select any existing Program up to 99 to save 6 Press the EXECUTE YES key The length of the time ABS 0 REC END of the program recording selected appears and the time shown can be edited The time is usually saved according to the time displayed however it is possible to shorten the time to save at this stage when saving the time In other words though the actual recording may be 9 minutes 00 seconds as shown in the example below that time can be edited to 5 minutes when saved As mentioned in the Note on page 85 if the data on the additional track is longer the time can be set to a longer time and saved however the maximum time that can be edited is 59 minutes 59 seconds Flashing 9 BT 24 s 6 JCI Fs qau kHz CLOCK INT 12 3 45 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 88 7 Press the EXECU
136. alance menu Initially it is set for unbalance but can be set to balanced input output Because the setup content is registered in the D2424 internal System ROM it will be held even though the current drive E IDE hard disk is replaced Initial setting UNBAL Unbalanced e Option UNBAL Unbalanced or BAL Balanced The settings cannot be saved and loaded as part of the song data The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the recorder Setting the input output balance unbalanced function E 1 While the recorder is stopped press the SETUP 3 Select the BAL or UNBAL with the JOG dial key to enter SETUP mode then press the EXECUTE YES key again The selected item will be registered and in Step 2 2 Turn the JOG dial to select BAL UNBAL will return to flashing flashes then press the EXECUTE YES key The display will change as shown below and the 4 Exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the EXIT presently setup item will be displayed NO key or STOP button The blinking will disappear when the EXECUTE YES key is pressed and the lighted item will change to flashing To cancel the operation or to restore the setting UNBAL will flash in the initial setting obtained prior to the EXECUTE YES key press press the STOP button or the EXIT NO key Each time you press one of these keys the recorder returns to the previous hierarchy level of the menu an
137. ally stops at the START point of program 05 which is to AUTO RTN END point be played back next If chain play is executed again at the stopped point it will stop again at the next program 10 START point PGM 02 AUTO RTN START point Auto Play mode In the auto play mode as shown in the example on the left upon reaching the END point of program 02 started in playback the recorder will automatically playback in setup order between the START points END points and at the moment playback is finished at the END point of the last program 01 stops at the START point of the first program AUTO RTN START mn di RTN END point STOP Pubak AUTO RTN START point PGM 02 diii RTN END point Papbak 1 AUTO RTN START point PGM 05 Padi RTN END point Repeat mode In the repeat mode playback is repeated AUTO RTN START ran gem RTN END point until the above auto play mode is Note If power is switched off and then switched on again while set to the Repeat mode AUTO RTN START point Pao RTN END point PGM 05 Playback playback will automatically start from the first program AUTO RTN START point P ud RTN END point 57 Fostex Model D2424 Reference Manual Chain Play function Setup of the Chain Play List The chain play list is setup via the Chain Play List me
138. also be shown When loading by selecting an existing program loading can be done in parallel with erasing super scripting this existing program Flashing LU Rd E El stooucd 2 d H 0 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 7 After selecting the program to load press the EXECUTE YES key The following will be displayed during load As load progresses the capacity indication will count down Upon completion of the load the display will return to the original time base and COMPLETED is displayed oL H i dBOZ E 5 i CLOCK 30 4 INT E 1 23 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 103 Notes e f there is insufficient capacity in the current drive to load a WAV file the capacity will be indicated in minus as In such a case select a program of a the right size or delete an unnecessary program by using the SETUP mode Delete PGM e The title of the loaded program will be replaced by the WAV file name beginning 6 letters which is loaded 8 Press the EXIT NO key or the STOP button COMPLETED will be extinguished Press the EXIT NO key or the STOP button to return to an earlier step or stop FOStex Model D2424 Reference Manual Saving and Loading Song Data r lt lt Special loading method when using a computer gt gt lt Note gt WAV files which can be saved loaded by this recorder
139. an the Off mode the D2424 will automatically locate to the AUTO RTN START point of the first program in the previously setup Chain list and stop If it was completed after setup to Off the D2424 will return to the first display of the program prior to entering the SETUP mode If the D2424 is played back after this functions of the mode selected will be executed from the first program in the chain list Normally in chain play as explained above execution starts from the first program on the chain list but any program of your choice can be specified and chain play executed from that program For details refer to Specify the program and execute chain play Important Be sure the Chain Play List is set up correctly be fore setting the chain play mode Each setting of the chain play mode except Off will not function if the previously mentioned Chain play list is not set up correctly beforehand If the mode is executed while set up of with an incorrect list after display ing Illegal P List the D2424 will automatically go to the previously mentioned Chain Play List menu Specify the Program and Execute Chain Play Specify at random a program set in the chain play list and execute chain play from the program specified This operation can be executed only when the Chain Play MD menu is set in other than Off 1 Press the PGM SEL key while the D2424 is in the stop mode
140. as setup by the MTC offset time setting and MTC offset mode setting In accordance to start time of the tune set by the sequence software setup as explained below Offset mode For ABS Set the MTC offset time about three seconds prior to the start time of the tune set by the sequence software Because the recorder cannot immediately chase lock after input of MTC in order to sync the unit from head of the tune set the preroll using the sequence software and playback from before the actual head of the tune to allow the recorder to enter into sync by the time it arrives at the head of the tune Offset mode For BAR BEAT The MTC offset time can be set to the same time as the start time of the tune set by the sequence software Because the ABS 0 position is set at the 0002BAR 1BEAT OOCLK position in the unit as mentioned before the preceding time required for sync is already set The preceding time of two bar lengths could change in length depending on the first bar s signature setting and tempo setting mentioned before For example it will be longer if the tempo is slowed down Confirming chase lock 1 When the sequence software is played MTC IN LED of the recorder will light CHASE in the display will change from blinking to lit and the chase lock will be completed Check that the MTC output by the sequence software and MTC time displayed in the recorder are the same 2 When the sequence software stops MTC w
141. ashes The size of the program also appears Turn the JOG dial in this state to select individual programs or select Save All 1 Press the SETUP key when the equipment is stopped Go to the SETUP mode Flashing 2 Turn the JOG dial to select SavePGM flashing Then press the EXECUTE YES key The menu to select the device to save the program on FUE GRO ES TREES OCMC IE E aT DATE appears SCSI flashes in the default mode HT Flashing or SA GE Inc E ni ced 2 48 24 30 2 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Flashing Use an optional DVD RAM as a device to save your programs on A menu appears when you select programs o that can be saved on one DVD disk If you select too i H60 many programs and all those programs cannot be saved d ili on one disk then the number of disks required to save SUCI IUUD DD MD I OL CUL oe all those programs and the program size alternately appears on the LCD Flashing 3 Turn the JOG dial to IDE2 so that it flashes Then press the EXECUTE YES key Find IDE Device Name The backup mode selection menu appears FDMS3 flashes in the default mode o 0 3 H H x a Flashing 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 5 Press the EXECUTE YES key to select the program that you want to save If you select individual programs the menu
142. at 16bit 44 1kHz Approx 1 150 minutes 20GB at 24bit 96kHz 6 0 1 step 10msec 5msec at 24bit 96kHz 20Hz to 20kHz at fs 44 1 44 8kHz 20Hz to 43kHz 2dB at fs 96kHz More than 108dB typical Quantization A D Converter D A Converter Recording Tracks Recording Time mono track Pitch Control Crossfade R P Freq Response Dynamic Range Input Output Input Output OdBu 0 775Vrms OdBV 1Vrms Ref Level Switchable to 12dB 20dB Can be set by the SETUP mode default 12dB Switchable to balanced 4dBu unbalanced 10dBV Can be set by the SETUP mode default 4dBu Analog Input 1 to 8 Connector TRS Phone jack Balanced Input Impedance More than 10k Q Ref Input Level 4dBu Switchable to unbalanced 10dBV Analog Output 1 to 24 Connector TRS Phone jack Balanced Load Impedance More than 600 Q Ref Output Level 4dBu Switchable to unbalanced 10dBV Data Input 1 8 9 16 17 24 Connector Optical Format IEC 60958 S P DIF Alesis Proprietary Multichannel Optical Digital Interface NPUT 1 8 only are effective when using S P DIF 143 Data Output 1 8 9 16 17 24 Connector Optical Format IEC 60958 S P DIF Alesis Proprietary Multichannel Optical Digital Interface WORD Input Connector BNC Input Level TTL level WORD Output Connector BNC Output Level TTL level RS 422 Connector D sub 9pin Protocol
143. ate for MMC and Fostex System Exclusive Message Also MTC Offset function and Offset Mode function are useful for setting up a sync environment using an external sequencing software Auto Punch In Out and Manual Punch In Out functions offer two modes Take for a real recording and Rehearsal for monitoring the part between the in and out points e The Program Select function enables you to select a song from up to 99 songs and name the songs A Bar Beat Resolution function is used to edit audio at the beginning of the beat round up or round off to a beat The Metronome function can be used as a rhythm guide for recording Various edit functions using an edit point locate point such as Copy amp Paste Move amp Paste Erase Auto Punch In Out Auto Locate are available You can also locate ABS O or REC END regardless of the edit point locate point A maximum of 99 Locate Pointers can be programmed for a LOCATE only feature Simply select the LOCATE number desired for swift location You can set a preroll time of O to 10 seconds A Disk Remain Display function offers a clear indication of available recording time and disk space in mono track recording You can choose the Time Base from ABS MTC and BAR BEAT CLK Fostex Model D2424 Reference Manual Main features Precautions Precautions e Be sure to connect the recorder to the power supply specified in the Spec
144. atically at the Punch In point 40 point and you can rehearsal Auto Punch In a starts from the Auto Return 2 Out Ps When the Auto Return End point is reached the recorder locates the Auto Return Start point Note If the recorder displays Over when you turn on the Auto Punch mode the disk does not have enough free space to perform Auto Punch In Out In such a case erase any unnecessary sections delete unnecessary program data or optimize the disk and execute again Model D2424 Reference Manual Punch In Out FOStex Auto Punch In Out Take After you are satisfied with your rehearsal you can proceed to an actual take of Auto Punch In Out You can undo or redo Auto Punch In Out recording if you change your mind The control panel settings are the same as those for rehearsal 1 Press the RECORD TRACK select key 3 11 19 to set track 3 to READY 2 Locate a point slightly before the Auto Punch In point 3 Confirm that Auto Punch mode is turned on Press the AUTO PUNCH key to turn on the function if it is not already on REHEARSAL TAKE LED flashes 4 Press the RECORD button while holding down the PLAY button Only TAKE LED red lights up and starts TAKE AUTO PUNCH REHEARSAL C eme Start point of Auto Punch In point Auto Punch Out point End point of playback Take In Take Out playback Track8 Track 7 Track 6 T
145. atting is complete press the EXIT NO key or the STOP button Model D2424 Reference Manual Formatting and Optimizing Disks FOStex Re Formatting the Current Drive or Newly Formatting the Backup Drive Follow procedures below to re format the current drive or newly format the E IDE hard disk for backup Note You cannot use the recorder to format a back up E IDE hard disk for saving and loading WAV files First format the disk for WAV files using a computer PC AT 1 Turn on the power to the recorder The recorder starts with an indication of the beginning Timebase ABS 0 of the program that was selected before the power was turned off Even if a back up E IDE hard disk is installed the current drive starts up when the power is turned on 2 Press the SETUP key to put the recorder into Setup mode 3 Use the JOG dial to select Disk Format and press the EXECUTE YES key IDE1 flashes in the same way mentioned in Formatting a new disk 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2223 24 Flashing 2 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 To format the current drive select IDE1 To format a back up E IDE hard disk select IDE2 4 Press the EXECUTE YES key while IDE1 or IDE2 isflashing The model name of the current drive s hard disk appears and SURE flashes 5 Press the EXECUTE YES key The recorder displays the scr
146. be 3 Adjust the system so the sound output from track recorded 24 can be monitored with the mixer 11 Play th ical inst tinti ith th You will hear the metronome sound output from track Play the musica instrument in ume wi e 24 using the Tempo Map created earlier metronome 4 After confirming the metronome sound stop the u recorder section and return to the top Program Quitting recording i 12 Press the STOP button to stop the recorder Adjusting monitor record level of the l p musical instrument Checking the recorded sound 5 Press the RECORD TRACK select key of the track to record the musical instrument on and then put 13 Turn OFF the ready track IRECORD TRACK select that track in the READY mode key l y 6 Press the RECORD button The LED of the RECORD button will flash and the READY track will go to the input monitor mode 14 Locate the top of the Program and start playback Adjust and monitor the track playback sound recorded on the mixer Since the metronome function still remains ON at this time you can hear the metronome sound 7 Press the PLAY button and playback the Program during playback of the recorded sounds when you turn from the top up the track 24 monitor volume Only the READY track will go to the input monitor mode recording does not take place and all other tracks will be in the reproduction monitor mode therefore track 24 plays back the metronome sound o If you
147. caeeeesecaeeaseecaeeesesaeeesesaeeeteetaseeseesaeeaseetanes 60 Preview Function Executing the preview function eseeseesseiesssesesseese nete enne enne tnnt te tn tne th tnt etntn tate tet tn tete enata tnter enses 63 Trimming the sound while previewing eese nennen nnne nennen treten eren nnns 63 Multiple Undo Function Using the Multiple Undo fUnctlon suu iir rtt darn diver n hat tente reet aped 65 Editing Tracks Copy amp Paste and Move amp Paste nr ctr ni einen De Ra Pea da dev RE Ea Pea Bp B ka 66 vjuorsietenusrereriajoroj i RES 67 Checking and adjusting the edit pOIDts iet rfr eete e erat in bt reserare utor aree oboe eb aar sehe 67 Executing Copy OE MOVE risctcereieet ese ett eeseedu eee E Dues ees ea r eve eee ves aree araa Araeta artean aesae eL oae tastes 67 Checking the clipboard data imei ee na n echa Eee Heo sepe AAEE Neia 67 Exe culting PASTS she inediti enero TET E A uinea E cA coul 68 single undo redo Paste ee teret torre er ee eco ed ed Haee Ee eov aca e PEHE ee REEIR kaSi aaae ritea oiiaaie asasi 68 Copy amp Paste between progra MSi aae E aaa aaa a aar E e aaea trn Ea etate trennt tetti nete a aterert tette treten nens 69 Checking the clipboard data eter trnatett ceteros ttai eo einer erba desea pe eeu i eus dee PETER EN aUe dele 69 Model D2424 Reference Manual Safety Instruction Contents FOSTEX cc M
148. can be entered via the JOG dial 001 999 selection of All Clear indication All Clear means that data in its Measures entirety will be cleared This is used to initialize the parameter Refer to Clearing stored time signature tempo data 1 4 2 4 3 4 4 4 5 4 1 8 3 8 5 8 6 8 7 8 8 8 f means no time signature assigned Time signatures and is used to delete time signature data Refer to Modifying or deleting stored time signatures for more information lt Note gt You cannot assign to measure 001 4 Press the EXECUTE YES key whenever you enter 107 a pair of measure time signature values Repeat this step to specify the necessary time signature for the measures To cancel the setting operation or to exit SETUP mode after storing data press the STOP button or the EXIT NO key Each time you press one of these keys the recorder returns to the previous hierarchy level of the menu and finally exits SETUP mode Fostex Model D2424 Reference Manual Changing the Initial Settings SETUP mode Modifying or deleting stored time signatures 1 Repeat steps 1 3 described in the Storing a time Caution signature section If moditying or deleting the stored time signature causes the bar beat setting for the tempo specified in the 2 Turn the SHUTTLE dial so that the flashing cursor Setting a tempo menu to disappear the tempo se
149. ce Manual Multiple Undo Function FOStex Using the Multiple Undo function 1 While the recorder is stopped press and hold 2 Use the JOG dial or the NEXT key and PREV down the SHIFT key and press the UNDO REDO key to select the desired date and time and press key the EXECUTE YES key The recorder displays the date and time of a take as The recorder displays Multiple Undo momentarily shown below and and SURE flash performs the Undo function and recalls the time base To select the date and time for another take turn the indication that was shown before the function was JOG dial performed COMPLETED lights up on the screen Flashing Flashing 3 Press the EXIT NO key or the STOP button COMPLETED turns off 42 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Helpful Tips To increase the free space on the disk available for the Multiple Undo function optimize the current drive disk using the Disk Optimize menu in Setup mode However remember that if you optimize a current drive disk that recorded several takes only the most recent take will remain and other takes will be erased If you wish to keep other takes follow the procedure below then optimize the disk Keeping only one take gt First apply the Multiple Undo function to the take you wish to keep then optimize the disk For example if six takes exist on the disk as shown below a
150. ce between these methods before you use the Erase function e If multiple Programs are set on the disk first select the desired Program Do not select another Program or select another sampling rate until you finish the erase operation Erasing a specified part of the data between ABS 0 Erasing data from a specified point to REC END and REC END e R You may erase all data in the range from a specified You may erase a specified part of the data between ABS point to REC END in the currently selected Program You O and REC END the end point of the recording in the can erase data on a mono real track or multiple real currently selected Program The erased part is replaced tracks To erase data on an additional track you need with silence You can erase data on a mono real track to move the data to a real track then erase it or multiple real tracks To erase data on an additional When you erase all tracks data the REC END point will track you need to move the data to a real track then move backward However if you erase data on a mono erase it As shown below the REC END point the end track or multiple tracks but not all tracks the REC point of recording is not affected END point may not be affected Refer to the note below The erased area is replaced with silence As a result the After the erase operation the REMAIN time and space REMAIN time and space will increase You will
151. ch program The setting can be saved loaded as song data This setting will be held even though power is switched OFF Refer to page 108 SETUP mode Time Signature Setting for operating procedure 3 Tempo in the desired bar can be set by Tempo setting of the SETUP mode Tempo map is made in steps 2 and 3 nitial setting 001 bar 1st meter Tempo120 Permissible bar setting Follows the previous Setup of the time signature Permissible signature setting Follows the previous Setup of the time signature Permissible setting of tempo Quarter note 30 250 Tempo elimination Permissible setting of maximum number of points 64 points This item can be set for each program The setting can be saved loaded as song data This setting will be held even though power is switched OFF Refer to page 109 SETUP mode Tempo Setting for operating procedure 4 Set the SETUP mode Metronome setting to ON if click sound is to be output according to the setup tempo map nitial setting Off Permissible setup item Off On This item can be set for each program The setting can be saved loaded as song data This setting will be held even though power is switched OFF Refer to page 111 SETUP mode Metronome setting for operating procedure 5 Press the DISP SEL key while holding down the SHIFT key and then change the
152. complete to restore the conditions that existed prior to the recording Press the UNDO REDO key again to restore the conditions that existed after the recording However the procedures explained here is for Single Undo Redo and there are limitations as written in the Notes below If the current drive was formatted with the multiple undo function ON Multiple Undo is also possible Refer to page 64 for details on the Multiple Undo function Notes at executing sigle undo redo gt Note 1 This function only works when this recorder is in the stop mode Note 2 After finishing manual punch in out please note that single Undo Redo is not possible ifthe following have been executed e If a new recording has been made e When a new editing job is executed such as Copy amp Paste Move amp Paste or Erase e When in the AUTO PUNCH ON mode when the AUTO PUNCH IN point is passed in the PLAY or RECORD mode e If the power was switched off e f program select was executed e When multiple undo is executed Fostex Model D2424 Reference Manual Recording Digital Data Recording Digital Data In addition to multirecording by connection to a digital mixer as explained in the separate Quick Operation Guide manual the following explains the direct digital recording method by connection to external digital equipment CD MD DAT adat etc When recording digital signals from an external digital equipment
153. connector of the recorder to the digital input connector on the external digital device Notes e The recorder has DATA OUTPUT connectors for an S P DIF digital signal OPTICAL and for an adat digital signal These connectors have the same shape but carry different information Use the DATA OUTPUT 1 8 connector to save data Do not use the DATA OUTPUT 9 16 and 17 24 connectors e Save load by S P DIF or adat digital signals cannot be executed from the current drive that is formatted in 96kHz 24 bit or 88 2kHz 24 bit adat or DAT ogag oo0o00p00000 ALII o0o000 C DATA OUTPUT 1 8 adat In or Digital In e If the external device has only COAXIAL type RCA digital I O connectors connect an optional COP 1 96k optical coaxial converter to use an S P DIF digital signal e Connecting both output and input connectors on the recorder to the input and output connectors on the external digital device respectively may generate a digital loop Setting up an external device 1 Set the same sampling rate to that of the recorder 2 Select digital input on the external device so that the external device will accept a digital signal On some external devices you may have to set up so that the external device will synchronize with the incoming digital signal Note
154. corder has DATA INPUT connectors for an S P DIF digital signal OPTICAL and for an adat digital signal These connectors have the same shape but carry different information Use the DATA INPUT 1 8 connector Do not use the DATA INPUT 9 16 and 17 24 connectors e Do not remove the optical cable or perform any other operation that would disconnect the S P DIF signal until the session is complete Otherwise the recorder will generate noise and affect the connected device adat or DAT ogggd OOOOOoOoOooooO L Ooo0000 at DATA INPUT 1 8 adat Out or Digital Out e If the external device has only COAXIAL type RCA digital I O connectors connect an optional COP 1 96k optical coaxial converter to use an S P DIF digital signal e Connecting both output and input connectors on the recorder to the input and output connectors on the external digital device respectively may generate a digital loop Setting up an external device 1 Setup the external device so that it can output a digital signal 2 Locate the beginning of the pilot signal recorded in the saved data Refer to the instruction manual that came with your external digital device for details Executing the load operation You will use the Load PGM menu in Setup mode e Input format
155. ct Eject and press the EXECUTE YES key Model D2424 Reference Manual Saving and Loading Song Data FOStex If 05 05 is selected The Flashing 05 05 will change to flashing only of the right 05 Flashing 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 The last track can be selected After setting to 05 24 by rotating the JOG dial and pressing the EXECUTE YES key the display will change the same as the previous WAV 0001 New PGM Numbers that can be selected for the right two digits must be greater than the left two digits In this example either of 05 24 This means that if the track was specified as 05 05 track 5 only will be saved 8 Press the EXECUTE YES key The display will change for entering the file name for the WAV file Flashing oi o H E 12 18 24 0 2 4 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 If the JOG dial is rotated at the flashing point any desired number symbol alphabet can be input The flashing point can be moved with the SHUTTLE dial Characters which can be input are limited to the following Alphabet capitals A Z Numbers 0 9 Symbols 95 amp G Q Although up to 6 letters can be input for the file name some of the letters symbols alphabets input here will be converted as follows Alphabet capitals A Z gt No conversion Alphabet small letters gt a z Converted
156. ction allows the recorder to start play back automatically from the located point AUTO PLAY mode should be turned on before you execute the Direct Locate function described above Note e This function is effective within 24 ABS hours Therefore if playback continues over the recording end point the recorder will still continue counting the time Also when the recorder locates ABS REC END it will continue counting the time from the recording end point However the unit does not access the disk after reaching the recording end point e If the Chain Play mode in the SETUP mode is set other than Off ON OFF of AUTO PLAY cannot be executed Example Operation at locating to the AUTO PUNCH IN point 2 Press the LOCATE key or memory key The recorder locates the point and plays as shown AS Y meat in the diagram 3 Press the STOP button to stop the unit i ERE gt PLAYBACK j SW o e You can set a preroll time in the Preroll Time menu i LOCATE LOCATE in SETUP mode so that the recorder will start playback START preroll time before the locate point You can set the preroll time from 0 to 10 seconds Refer to the chapter Changing the Initial Settings SETUP Mode on page 112 1 Press the AUTO RTN AUTO PLAY key to turn on the AUTO PLAY LED O AUTO RTN avro PLAY Auto Return function This function allows the recorder to play data up to the AUTO RTN END point t
157. ction is stopped Especially never attempt to turn off the power to the recorder while the hard disk is accessing data the ACCESS LED is lit or flashing Otherwise not only will you lose recorded data you may damage to the unit lt Note gt Should this power switch be switched On Off in quick succession in some cases it will fail to switch On at all This is due to functioning of the internal protection circuit and is not a breakdown Consequently should such a symptom appear switch Off power for a moment then switch On again after waiting 1 or 2 minutes Model D2424 Reference Manual Names and Functions FOSt X Detachable Controller section 2 2aTRACK DIG FAL RECORDERL C Tal ACCESS 33 32 1 Controller Connection Cable Connect this cable to the recorder controller connection jack 2 Record track select key RECORD TRACK ENVELOPE SAFE READY of the recording track can be selected The track can be selected by shifting to 1 8 9 16 or 17 24 with the TRACK SHIFT key If the select key is pressed once that track will be in the READY state and the track display O will blink It will change to SAFE if pressed again and the track display will be extinguished When recording is started from the READY mode the blinking track display will light If the RECORD button only is pressed from the READY mode the READY track only will enter input monitor mode and the recording level can be adju
158. d SURE will flash This indicates that the system is in the stand by state to delete a program that is currently started up Flashing 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 E To cancel the delete operation press the EXIT NO key while SURE is flashing Each time you press the button or key the recorder will return to a higher level in the hierarchy and finally exit SETUP mode 4 Press the EXECUTE YES key again When the recorder displays Deleting and finishes deleting the Program the data of the next Program number moves in and its ABS time appears 5 Press the EXIT NO key or STOP button To check the REMAIN time and free space press the DISP SEL key to display the REMAIN indication after the Program is deleted Editing a Program title You can name the Program as explained in the Creating a new Program section You can also change the title later by using the Title Edit menu in SETUP mode lt Note gt You can edit the title of the selected Program before you select SETUP mode You cannot select a Program after the recorder enters SETUP mode Be sure to select the desired Program using the steps explained in the Using the Program Change function section 1 Press the SETUP key while the recorder is stopped to put the system in the SETUP mode 2 Turn the JOG dial to select the first hierarchy level of the Title Edit
159. d The save process appears as in the above case When the first disk is full that disk is ejected and the display will indicate Insert second disk 123 45 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Save is automatically resumed when the second disk is inserted in the SCSI drive The same process is repeated when a third or more disks are required When the program is successfully saved on the last disk the program time base indication ABS 0 that was started up prior to entering the SETUP mode appears and COMPLETED lights up 6 Press the STOP button or the EXIT NO key to quit the Setup mode Note You cannot interrupt the save operations on the SCST hard disk as with adat or S P DIF digital signal You will have to start the save process from the very first disk again if you erroneously press the EXIT NO key during the insertion of several disks required to save the program on Press the eject switch on the SCSI drive to remove the disk from the SCSI drive after the program has been successfully saved Please remember this gt The instructions on the left was based on use of disks that were already formatted for backup use when saving programs using several disks It is recommended that all the disks to save data on are already formatted prior to the save process However there may be times that you will unexpectedly not have enough formatted disks during the save
160. d finally exits SETUP mode and displays the previous Time Base 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Flashing 12 3 4 5 6 7 B 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 126 Model D2424 Reference Manual Changing the Initial Settings SETUP mode FOStex Drive Format Information Drive Info menu Format information of the current drive presently installed can be checked by using the Drive Format Information menu Should any trouble occur in the recorder providing the information obtained here to our nearest Fostex Service Station will be of great help in giving quick service The following items will be displayed and can be confirmed Format method Format type Number of bits at formatting coe NOOA ON Present number of programs 9 Present number of free blocks 12 Specific capacity of the drive 14 Present software version xs Manufacture Model of the currently installed hard disk Last day of formatting in standard type Simultaneously recordable number of tracks Sampling frequency at formatting 10 Audio file maximum number of events and its program No 11 Maximum number of events of the time code and its program number 13 Remaining capacity of the drive 15 Present multiple undo function mode on off Checking method of the format information 1 While the recorder is stopped press the SETUP key to enter SETUP mode
161. d on the track variates in real time During forward direction scrub the F FWD LED lights up and during rewind direction scrub the REWIND LED lights up 3 Adjust the monitor sound of the selected track so that it can be monitored on the mixer 4 Press the RECORD TRACK select key of the desired record track to select another track Please Wait will briefly appear and then go to the envelope indication of the selected track The following example shows the case when the indication is switched from track 4 to track 12 BBRShemwco SE 5 Press the STOP button to stop the envelope function Doing so will turn OFF the envelope function The recorder will return to the time base indication prior to turning the envelope function ON 61 Fostex Model D2424 Reference Manual Preview Function Preview Function The preview function enables you to repeatedly audition the rise fade in or the fall fade out of the sound data at a locate point edit point that is stored in the AUTO PUNCH IN OUT AUTO RTN START END or CLIPBOARD IN OUT key This is also called point rehearsal With this function you can check the locate points in real time You can also use this function to fine tune the position of the locate points while previewing the sound This function is effective only when the recorder is stopped Previewing the rise of the sound fade in While holding down the SHIFT key press the AUTO RTN ST
162. d the distance 2 Controller mount The detachable remote controller is mounted on the front panel 3 Hard disk access LED Red This LED lights up or blinks when the hard disk is writing or reading data Same as the ACCESS LED on the detachable remote controller 4 Lock Unlock key When you remove or install the hard disk cartridge you need to lock unlock here using the included key 5 Hard disk power LED Green This LED lights up if the hard disk operates correctly when you turn the power on to the recorder 6 Removable hard disk cartridge slot This slot is used to insert a removable hard disk cartridge This system allows you to replace the hard disk easily Refer to Quick operation Guide for more information on how to replace the removable hard disk cartridge lt Note gt The recorder package contains a caddy without a hard disk Install your hard disk in this caddy 7 Blank panel for installing an optional unit This is used when installing the optional Model 9044 BAY CADDY Another E IDE hard disk can be installed by mounting the Model 9044 Because the Model 9044 must be mounted by the Fostex Service Station please inquire at your store of purchase or the Fostex Service Station 8 Power switch This switch turns the main power to the recorder on off lt WARNING 1 Before turning the power off to the recorder first quit the SETUP mode and make sure that the recorder se
163. d tracks into input monitoring status Pressing this button again will reset the tracks to playback monitoring The RECORD LED will blink when the readied tracks are in input monitoring status Pressing the PLAY button while holding down this button will place the readied tracks into recording At this time the PLAY LED and RECORD LED will light and the readied track indication will be light steadily instead of blinking Refer to page 28 of the Before Starting section for more information about input monitoring and reproduce monitoring 30 Auto Punch Mode On Off key AUTO PUNCH Switch this key ON for auto punch in out When you press this key while a correct value is stored to the AUTO PUNCH IN key and the AUTO PUNCH OUT key both the REHEARSAL LED and TAKE LED will blink indicating that Auto Punch mode is on If a correct value is not stored pressing the AUTO PUNCH key will not turn the parameter ON and the message Void Out Point will appear Pressing the PLAY button under this condition will put the recorder into Rehearsal mode for Auto Punch In Out recording Pressing the PLAY button and RECORD button simultaneously will put the recorder into Take mode There are five combinations of the REHEARSAL LED and TAKE LED that indicate the status of the recorder regarding auto punch recording Auto Punch mode OFF Both REHEARSAL LED and TALE LED are off Auto Punch m
164. de press the EXECUTE YES key The disk optimize function starts When it is complete COMPLETED lights up Lit 2 Turn the JOG dial to select the Disk Optimize menu and press the EXECUTE YES key The recorder displays the following indication and SURE flashes E JN ate E CLOCK E ZINTE 2 Ed 123485 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 4 Press the EXIT NO key or STOP button to exit Setup mode Flashing eim a H IOM Yao CLOCK INT E 2 2 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 34 Model D2424 Reference Manual Handling Programs FOStex Handling Programs This chapter explains how to handle Programs It covers the following topics 1 Creating a new Program 2 Using a Program Change function 3 Duplicating a Program 4 Deleting a Program 5 Editing a Program title Creating a new Program You can manage individual songs by setting multiple programs on the disk as explained in the Managing Songs by Program Selection section of the Before Starting chapter You can set up to 99 Programs One Program is automatically created on the disk when the disk is newly formatted with this equipment Follow the steps below to create a new Program The prerequisite of this operation is that the disk is in an initial state where there is only one Program on the disk Note e When a ne
165. de figures will light up in the D2424 display as shown below 2 Turn the JOG dial to select Ref Level At the 12dB setting At the 20dB setting flashes then press the EXECUTE YES key A flashing will extinguish by pressing the EXECUTE YES key and the reference level information that was lit will being flashing Initial setting it will show 12dB E 2 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Flashing E 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 3 Select the desired reference level with the JOG dial then press the EXECUTE YES key again The selected reference level will be registered and in Step 2 will return to flashing 4 Exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the EXIT NO key or STOP button To cancel the operation or to restore the setting obtained prior to the EXECUTE YES key press press the STOP button or the EXIT NO key Each time you press one of these keys the recorder returns to the previous hierarchy level of the menu and finally exits SETUP mode and displays the previous Time Base 125 FOStex Model D2424 Reference Manual Changing the Initial Setting SETUP mode Setup of input output Balance Unbalance BAL UNBAL menu Whether the D2424 rear panel analog input output connectors should be set to balanced or unbalanced lines can be setup at the Setup of input output balance unb
166. dealer or the nearest FOSTEX service station to ask about repairs Use the packing carton designed for the recorder when you transport the recorder to the dealer for repair or return If you have discarded the packing box try to pack the recorder completely using shock absorbing materials Fostex is not responsible for malfunction or damage due to incomplete packaging or caused during transport About copyrights e t is prohibited by law to use any part of a CD recording or video images or audio data for which copyright is possessed by a third party for commercial purposes such as contents broadcasts sales or distribution any purpose other than for your personal pleasure About damage e FOSTEX is not responsible for any direct damage or indirect damage caused by using the recorder Model D2424 Reference Manual Names and Functions FOStex Front panel 1 Front panel 2 Rear panel TARA Fostex Model D2424 Reference Manual Names and Functions Names and Functions Front Panel section 2 3 E 24TRACK DIGITAL R FORDER 2 ml 8 1 Detachable remote controller connector The detachable remote controller is connected here You can remove the controller Connect the optional extension cable Model 8551B to exten
167. del D2424 Reference Manual Storing a Locate Point Edit Point 1 While the recorder is stopped press the memory i e You can store the edited data in a memory key other key that stores the data you wish to edit iei d than the one you pressed when you recalled the data The a p n on the display and the recorder For example you can recall the AUTO PUNCH IN point enters data edit mode data edit it and store it to the AUTO PUNCH OUT 2 Turn the SHUTTLE dial to move the flashing key cursor to the time value digit and use the JOG e You can also use the Preview function to edit the dial to increase or decrease the value stored locate points edit points Refer to Preview Function on page 62 for more information 3 Press the STORE key The Press LOCATE menu will appear as indicated e Refer to page 39 for more information on Auto before Ignore this go to the next step Punch In Out e Refer to page 66 for more information on Copy amp Paste Move amp Paste and Erase e Refer to page 55 for more information on Auto Return and Auto Repeat 4 Press the memory key that you pressed in Step 1 again The STORE LED will turn off The edited data is stored and the recorder displays the previous Time Base indication Storing and editing LOCATE key You can store up to 99 individual time data in the LOCATE key for Locate only operations The time data stored can also
168. desired LOCATE number then press the LOCATE key The data edit mode will appear when the data stored in the selected LOCATE number appears 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Flashing 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2223 24 3 Turn the SHUTTLE dial to move the cursor column of the time indication to edit cursor flashing point increase or decrease the number setting with the JOG dial or input the desired time base 53 4 Press the STORE key the STORE LED lights up The LOCATE number selection menu to store data will appear Flashing 1234567 B 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 2324 e If the STORE key is press instead of the LOCATE key at this stage it becomes possible to directly LOCATE the time data of the selected LOCATE number For more details refer to the next section on Locate Functions 5 You can use the JOG dial to input the desired LOCATE number 6 Press the LOCATE key The edit time data is stored as the time data for the selected LOCATE number Fostex Model D2424 Reference Manual Locate Function Locate Function The recorder swiftly locates it moves the current location of the recorder section the desired point when necessary Locate include edit points in ABS time MTC time or in bar beat clock that are stored for the Copy Move Paste Erase or Auto Punch In Out operations They also include
169. digital signals to be input to the DATA INPUT connector of the D2424 must be setup for S P DIF S P DIF digital signals or adat adat digital signals in the Digital Input Setup menu of the D2424 SETUP mode At the same time the digital in clock Sync mode async mode should also be selected and setup for either sync with external digital signals or with the internal clock Digital recording can be done on the currently active program and Setup for digital inputs will be effective on all programs even when multiple number of programs are currently setup Connecting external digital equipment pm A 1 Interconnect the DATA INPUT connector of D2424 and OPTICAL OUT or adat OUT connector of the external digital equipment with an optical cable Depending on the digital signal S P DIF or adat to be recorded the DATA INPUT connector will function as explained below Notes on interconnecting gt When using the D2424 DATA INPUT connector it must be set for either S P DIF digital signals optical or adat digital signals via Setup of digital inputs in the SETUP mode The connector type is the same for S P DIF digital signals and adat digital signals but information content of the digital signal is different Also depending on the selected digital signal each DATA INPU
170. ding Song Data If for example you choose 01 as illustrated in the case above you can save all programs If you select 03 you can save the programs from program 03 to the last program Select either New PGM or an existing program number Then press the EXECUTE YES key The save process starts The REMAIN counter size to save starts counting down The following is an example of saving data to backup number p01 o 3 H 8 1 L 1 23 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 When the data is saved COMPLETED lights up on the display Then the system escapes from the SETUP mode If you are saving data on more than one DVD RAM disk the first disk is ejected when data is saved on it then a message prompting Set Second Disk appears on the LCD Follow the instructions and set the next disk in the DVD RAM drive The data is automatically saved on the second disk 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 22 When all the data that you want to save are saved press the EXIT NO key or STOP key to turn off the COMPLETED message Loading in the FDMS 3 Mode Load the data that you saved on you backup E IDE hard disk or optional DVD RAM Data is loaded from the Load PGM menu in the SETUP mode as in the case when S P DIF and adat digital signals were loaded or when loading data on SCSI devices 1 Press the SETUP key while in
171. ding data byte numbers Complies to the MMC MIDI MACHINE CONTROL standard track bit map In D2424 you always need to specify two byte combinations of rO and r1 00 no message 01 completed completion flag 02 active execution flag 02 mmc time Indicates unprocessed time by active execution flag and mmc time 02 count mmc track Indicates source track by active execution flag and mmc track Used for clipboard play 03 cancel execution stop 05 Indicates rehearsal rehearsal mode of auto rec Possible of undo 06 Indicates take take mode of auto rec Possible of undo 10 over value error 10 mmc time Capacity shortage time is indicated by over value error error by capacity shortage and mmc time In copy paste it indicates capacity shortage time required for a minimum one time paste 11 Indicates in point error incorrect in point 12 Indicates out point error incorrect out point 14 Indicates void data data necessary for paste does not exist 18 Indicates track select error track necessary to execute copy move or erase cut is not correctly setup 19 repeat count Indicates repeat number error and repeat numbers executable by repeat count 1A Indicates disable rec record disable mode 25 Indicates can t undo rehearsal rehearsal mode of auto rec Impossible to undo 26 Indicates can t undo take take mode of auto rec Impossible toundo
172. ding down the SHIFT key to activate the following shift invoked functions Key with SHIFT function Function RECORD TRACK SELECT keys Executes the envelope function of the selected track TRACK SHIFT key Switches ON OFF of the input monitor for all tracks RECORD button Switches SAFE READY for all tracks CLIPBOARD IN OUT key AUTO PUNCH IN OUT key AUTO RTN START END key Executes preview of the stored point of each memory key EXIT NO key Ejects disk in the external SCSI drive Please see lt Note gt below EXECUTE YES key Switches the slave mode ON OFF DISP SEL key Selects the time base EDIT key Switches TC READY ON OFF SETUP key Enters the TC GEN setup mode UNDO REDO key Enters the multiple undo executing mode VARI PITCH key Enters the vari pitch data editing mode Refer to page 105 for details on the SETUP mode Refer to the APPENDIX at end of this manual in regards to the TC generator mode Refer to page 64 for details on multiple undo function Refer to the Quick Operation Guide in regards to editing of Vari Pitch data Refer to page 62 for details on preview Refer to page 60 for details on the envelope function lt Note gt Ejecting or removing the backup SCSI disk is only possible when the drive is set to SCSI via the SETUP mode Setup of the drive If the drive is
173. dividually For example the first song can be Program 1 the second song can be Program 2 etc You need to recall the desired Program before you start recording playback editing or reachieving Pressing the PGM key will cause the recorder to enter Program select mode display the message Select PGM followed by the current Program and Program number and a flashing SURE indication 9g 2 123 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Fostex Model D2424 Reference Manual Names and Functions You can select the desired Program from the already setup Programs by rotating the JOG dial while the Program number and SURE are flashing After you select a Program press the EXECUTE YES key to return to the selected Program s ABS indication The Time Base display will indicate the selected Program s Time Base since you can set the Time Base for each Program individually To change the Time Base display after you have selected the desired Program press the DISP SEL key while holding down the SHIFT key Pressing only the DISP SEL key will take you to the REMAIN display based on the current Time Base Notes e The maximum record time of the program is dependent on the permissible record time size of the hard disk regardless of how many programs are created on the disk If for example there is roughly 30 minu
174. e This example shows overdubbing in which the keyboard is RECORD button while holding down the SHIFT key recorded on track 5 while tracks 1 4 are being played Tracks 1 4 are in Playback Monitoring mode and used to check the playback Aa ds Mn set to Input Monitoring to sound Track 5 is in Input Monitoring mode You can monitor the recorded sound To enter the recording mode with any desired track or all tracks in the READY state press the PLAY button while Note holding down the RECORD button READY tracks will When in the Auto EE MD menu of the D2424 SETUP oe c pee es LUI iem e mode the all input monitor mode can be entered auto Simultaneous with entering the recording mode READY rand eed eee vicc de Auto EE MD tracks will be input monitoring and recording can be done DICAM FEET TONE mode Auto f while monitoring the recording sound at the recorder menu in page 123 output L J Playback monitoring Playback monitoring means to monitor the playback sound of the tracks only Real tracks That is you are monitoring the playback sound on the track not the sound being recorded to the track The following example shows that all tracks are in Playback Monitoring mode Traci Traci Traci In this example all tracks 1 8 are playing the recorded sound in Playback Monitoring mode Monitoring Track section Traci 8 7 6 Track 5 Vocal 4 3 2 Traci
175. e display The level meter shows the Track 1 24 output level of the recorder section The time display shows the current time of the recorder section using ABS TIME Absolute time MTC MIDI time code or MIDI BAR BEAT bar beat This display also shows messages required for interactive operation The following section explains the display functions and provides with some examples 1 Display shown when the power is turned on When you turn on the power to the recorder and the connected E IDE hard disk a formatted hard disk the display shows the Initializing message Current Dr the name of the connected current drive then recording mode Standard format etc and finally the top position of the disk in the time base ABS MTC or BAR BEAT CLK used in the last Program before you turned the power off The following example indicates that the recorder started with the ABS Time Base used in Program 1 19 Fostex Model D2424 Reference Manual Names and Functions 2 Preset Display The display below shows all preset items for explanation purpose Level meter 35 dot message display This display indicates the ABS time MTC time value or bar beat clock value and a parameter name in the SETUP mode Displays recorder output level or recording level for each track In the current drive formatted to 96 kHz 24 bits or 88 2 kHz 24 bits 8 only tracks 1 8 will 30 30 function Track indications Each frame will blink when
176. e In Out nap BRUNNEN MINE 39 PPE PAT ACOs actis eve rr verte ee e voe ee Aen IE V EUSE VR FE TN VERRE EE Yea EE RETE EN RETIE 39 Rehearsing Auto Punch In OUt i ree eh eno pastas toes bo pF yen ta kao rts eee ae Edl ee ease Pe Up epa so ses eR ee eden OR 40 Auto Punch In Out Takes eese ri deos tta Suess des ote cte retreat en Por reserva aerea Debe rese eiu iasa adarte rasni 41 Single ndo redoautopunch N OL tues ceo ote ti Hee ieri ree taret Leere toros pes Ip eEoeb epe Ue 41 Manual P nch 07 8 C RN 42 louseE WIRE e 42 Rehearsing Manual Punch In QUt i i eceites eere roite bebes eb co eoa ta to seven a et esa aa d ea Fes ERR VEN A Du a epar eeu a 42 ManualkP unch In Out TAKE 4 2 arretea enter eee terere tene ev pana Sea Siae eo euet Praet eee erint te eee eue 43 Single undo redo manual punch in Out eee eese esee tente etes entia ensis tn estne at enses einen 43 FOStex Model D2424 Reference Manual Safety Instruction Contents Recording Digital data Digital recording from an external digital device sssssssssssseee eene nnne nnne enne nnne 44 Digital recording to an external digital device essent nennen nnne trennen 46 Connecting a Digital ci 47 Recording to a Metronome Sound Suec M 49 Storing a Locate Point Storing and editing the locate points to the memory keys
177. e locate points to the memory keys section for information on storing the copy or move start and end points and the paste start point Store the copy or move start point to the CLIPBOARD IN key the end point to the CLIPBOARD OUT key and store the paste start point to the AUTO PUNCH IN key e See Storing and editing the locate points to the memory keys on page 50 Checking and adjusting the edit points P R ne P eni After you store the edit points you can check them on the display by pressing the corresponding keys You may also adjust the points This section explains how to preview and fine tune the edit points using the Preview function 1 While the recorder section is stopped press and hold down the SHIFT key and press the memory key for which you wish to check the edit point You can preview fade in at the CLIPBOARD IN point fade out at the CLIPBOARD OUT point and fade out at AUTO PUNCH IN point 2 Trim the edit point while previewing e Refer to Preview Function on page 62 for more information 67 Executing Copy or Move 1 Press the RECORD TRACK select key of the copy or move source track to set it READY Select from mono tracks or adjacent odd even tracks 1 2 3 4 5 6 etc Note If you select non adjacent tracks such as track 1 and 3 or tracks 1 and 4 the copied or moved data wil
178. e program head value is in the eile aed Gearlog memory Should fade out preview be executed in this iti he Void Data message and memory data AUTO PUNCH IN key The recorder plays the fall condition the Vo AUTO RTN END key fade out of the sound at the 00h 00m 00s will alternately flash in the display as a CLIPBOARD OUT key locate point stored in the keys warning However for fade in preview this will function as the memory data 00h 00m 00s point AUTO PUNCH OUT key The recorder plays the fall AUTO RTN START key fade in of the sound at the 3 Press the STOP button or the EXIT NO key CLIPBOARD IN key locate point stored in the keys Trimming the sound while previewing You can trim the position of the locate point edit point using the JOG dial while you preview the sound At this time you can also adjust the size of the trimming steps the amount of offset controlled by the JOG dial Trimming allows you to fine tune the position of the locate point stored in the memory keys while previewing the sound Use this function to change the Auto Punch In Out points the start point of Copy amp Paste and Move amp Paste and the start and end points of the Erase function lt Notes gt e You can audition the result of trimming during the next preview That is if you trim the position while previewing the sound for the first time you can check the result when you preview the sound next
179. e recorder returns to the previous hierarchy level of the menu and finally exits SETUP mode and displays the previous Time Base Notes e Should DIGITAL flash in the display check the connecting cable between the external equipment and the external equipment setting IOM rs Sau CLOCK INT 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 e When the digital input is set up for adat Async or Sync should any one among the three DATA INPUT 1 8 9 16 17 24 be locked DIGITAL will light up 3 Select the desired digital signal and digital in clock with the JOG dial In addition to Analog adat Async adat Sync SPDIF Async or SPDIF Sync can be selected in the display In such a case tracks not locked will be automatically set for analog input By using this function for example if analog signals are input to tracks 1 8 and adat digital signals to tracks 9 16 and 17 24 a total of 24 tracks can be recorded simultaneously Async Sync which is displayed together with the digital signal S P DIF or adat must be selected to whether the system is to be synchronized or not with the digital in clock Setting digital output D out menu By using the Setting a digital output menu the type of digital signal to be output to external digital equipment from the DATA OUTPUT connector 1 8 9 16 17 24 of this recorder can be setup Also by usin
180. e saved each time in the order of Track 1 and 2 3 and 4 etc to a DAT machine Eight tracks are saved each time in the order of Track 1 8 9 16 etc to an adat machine 12 When data is successfully saved a COMPLETED message will appear on the display and stop the external DAT or adat 13 Press the STOP button or the EXIT NO key to quit the Setup mode The display will return to the previous time base indication To cancel the operation or restore the indication shown before you pressed the EXECUTE YES key press the STOP button or the EXIT NO key Pressing one of these keys repeatedly takes you to the previous layer finally quitting the Setup mode and the display will return to the previous time base indication If you press the STOP button or the EXIT NO key any time after you execute the save operation but before it is complete the saved song data will be invalid Model D2424 Reference Manual Saving and Loading Song Data FOStex Loading the data using a adat or S P DIF digital signal Load the data by S P DIF digital signals or adat digital signals from the DATA INPUT jack of the recorder Restore the initial settings on the recorder Set the same sampling rate on the external digital device and the recorder Connecting the external device Connect DATA INPUT connectors of the recorder to the digital output connectors on the external digital device Notes e The re
181. e track AUTO PUNCH IN ponts Paste Copy clip Paste destination track AUTO PUNCH IN points N Paste Paste destination track As shown in the drawing points for copy or move are called the CLIPBOARD IN point for the copy or move starting point and CLIPBOARD OUT point for the ending point and the paste starting point is called the AUTO PUNCH IN point 66 Model D2424 Reference Manual Editing Tracks FOSt X Notes e The data on the clipboard will be replaced by new data each time you execute the COPY or MOVE e If pasted data overlaps the source data the content of the source data will be altered Perform Copy amp Paste and Move amp Paste in the following order The explanation here is on Copy amp Paste or Move amp Paste methods in the currently active program For Copy amp Paste between programs read page 69 Store the copy or move start point CLIPBOARD IN point end point CLIPBOARD OUT point and the paste start point AUTO PUNCH IN point T Check the stored edit points using the Preview function and make adjustments if necessary Specify the copy or move source track and copy or move the data to the clipboard Specify the destination track and the number of times for the paste operation repeated paste and execute the paste operation Storing the edit points 1 Refer to the Storing and editing th
182. ecorder to format a SCSI disk or optional DVD RAM disk for saving and loading WAV files First format the disk for WAV files using a computer PC AT 1 Press the SETUP key to put the recorder into Setup mode 2 Turn the JOG dial to select the Disk Format menu and press the EXECUTE YES key IDE1 flashes 33 Flashing 2 2 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2223 24 Fostex Model D2424 Reference Manual Formatting and Optimizing Disks 3 Use the JOG dial to select flashing SCSI or IDE2 and press the EXECUTE YES key When formatting the disk of the SCSI drive connected to the SCSI connector select SCSI or IDE2 when formatting the optional DVD RAM disk When the EXECUTE YES key is pressed the drive name will be shown in the display Flashing Flashing 4 Press the EXECUTE YES key again The backup format will be displayed Depending on quantization of the current drive either 24 bit Backup or 16 bit Backup will be shown Flashing Flashing 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2223 20 Bit resolution The same figures in quantization of the current drive will be displayed for quantization of the backup for mat Thus when the current drive is 24bit 24bit Backup will be displayed and for 16bit 16bit Backup will be displayed 5 Press and hold down the RECORD button and press the EXECUTE YES key The
183. ecording start point for the Auto Punch In Out operation ATO PUNGI BU Paste start point for the Copy amp Paste or Move amp Paste operation Erase start point for the Erase operation Locating the AUTO PUNCH OUT point AUTO PUNCH OUT key Recording end point for the Auto Punch In Out operation Erase end point for the Erase operation Locating the CLIPBOARD IN point CLIPBOARD IN key Copy start point for copying or moving data to the clipboard during the Copy amp Paste or Move amp Paste operation Locating the CLIPBOARD OUT point CLIPBOARD OUT key Copy end point for copying or moving data to the clipboard during the Copy amp Paste or Move amp Paste operation Locating the AUTO RTN START point AUTO RTN START key Locate end point from AUTO RTN END in Auto Return or Auto Repeat modes Locating the AUTO RTN END point AUTO RTN END key Locate start point to AUTO RTN START in Auto Return or Auto Repeat modes Note on storing the locate point When you set the IN OUT points for Auto Punch In Out IN OUT points for Copy amp Clip Move amp Clip and START END points for Auto Return Auto Repeat make sure that IN points precede the OUT points and START points precede the END points You can also store time data in the LOCATE key in addition to each memory key explained above You can store up to 99 individual time data in the LOCATE key for locate only features
184. ect Resolution flashes then press the EXECUTE YES key The current BAR BEAT resolution mode setting appears on the display Pressing the EXECUTE YES key turns off the flashing 2 character and the BAR BEAT resolution mode setting flashes With the initial setting Off flashes as shown below 2008 i i 2 E E 2 a a 3 2 1 Q er 24 uo es HBUS clock INT 12345 6 7 B 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 When you turn the JOG dial clockwise and counter clockwise On and Off flash alternately Selecting On turns BAR BEAT resolution mode on and selecting Off turns BAR BEAT resolution mode off 4 Press the EXECUTE YES key The selected mode setting is stored and flashes To cancel the operation or to restore the setting obtained prior to the EXECUTE YES key press press the STOP button or the EXIT NO key Each time you press one of these keys the recorder returns to the previous hierarchy level of the menu and finally exits SETUP mode and displays the previous Time Base Setting the MIDI device number Device ID menu The Setting the MIDI device number menu enables you to set the recorder device ID number required to control the unit from a sequence software using MMC MIDI Machine Control or FEX Fostex System Exclusive Message The transmit device ID links to this setting You can set the device ID
185. ecting gt DATA OUTPUT of the D2424 must be setup for S P DIF digital signals optical or adat digital signals by the Setup of digital output menu in the SETUP mode Although the connector type is same for both S P DIF digital and adat digital signals their information content is different Depending on the digital signal selected the following signals are output from each output connector lt At output of S P DIF digital eee f mE I C INPUT OUTPUT 24 17 16 9 8 EX x Output of tracks 1 2 At output of adat digital signals DATA INPUT C OUTPUT 16 9 8 1 24 17 16 9 8 1 DAE ae Output of tracks 17 24 Output of tracks 9 16 Output of tracks 1 8 C 16 9 24 17 OOO fd _ Output of tracks 3 4 24 17 Output of tracks 5 6 46 Model D2424 Reference Manual Recording Digital Data FOStex Note Connecting the recorder to an external digital device via both digital input and output jacks may generate a digital loop f the connected external device has only a COAXIAL RCA pin jack for digital input use an optional Fostex COP 1 96k optical coaxial converter Note Data on the additional tracks cannot be digitally recorded to the external device as it is To output digital data from the additional track move it to the real tracks first then output it to the external device using the Track Exchange function For more information
186. een that enables you to set the sampling frequency and bit resolution The FS quantization display when IDE2 is selected will show the same figure for the current drive and any other cannot be selected Press the EXECUTE YES key while the present screen is shown in the display 6 Select the desired sampling frequency and bit resolution using the JOG dial and press the EXECUTE YES key The recorder displays the screen which enables you to set the Multiple Undo function on or off 7 Set the Multiple Undo function on or off using the JOG dial and press the EXECUTE YES key The recorder displays the screen which enables you to select the format type If you have formatted the disk with Standard Format you can select either Standard Format or Erase Format If you have formatted the disk with Quick Format you can select either Standard Format or Quick Format Be sure to select Standard Format to format a back up E IDE hard disk 8 Use the JOG dial to select the desired format type then press and hold down the RECORD button and press the EXECUTE YES key The recorder starts formatting the disk Formatting a backup disk SCSI disk or optional DVD RAM disk In the following the disk for backup SCSI disk or optional DVD RAM disk will be formatted The disk for backup will be formatted in 24 bit Backup or 16 bit Backup to match the current drive quantization lt Note gt You cannot use the r
187. elect the Slave mode on off Refer to page 66 for more information about using this key for the Paste or Erase operation Refer to page 105 for more information about using this key in SETUP mode Refer to page 80 83 for more information about using this key for the Slave Mode operation FOStex Model D2424 Reference Manual Names and Functions 16 Recall key RECALL This is pressed to call out the time figure or bar beat clk figure data stored in locate number 0 99 If the LOCATE key is pressed after pressing this key the RECALL LED will light and Press LOCATE is displayed Next by pressing the LOCATE key after specifying a desired locate number the time figure in memory will be recalled into the specified number and the recorder will enter the edit mode Press the LOCATE key to execute this time figure Refer to page 54 for more information about using this key for the Locate operation 17 Next key NEXT NEXT TC If this key is pressed when in the recorder is in the PLAY STOP F FWD or REW mode locate will be executed to the next memory point from the present location point When inputting characters in the title edit mode it serves as a character short cut function The memory number can be advanced with each press of this key when the recorder displays Press LOCATE 18 Previous key PREV PREV TC If this key is pressed when the recorder is in the PL
188. em 2 MMC Device ID 00 99 127 MTC Inquiry FOSTEX Exclusive rem 3 START STOP CONTINUE Mode 1 OMNI ON POLY Mode 3 OMNI OFF POLY Mode 2 OMNI ON MONO Mode 4 OMNI OFF MONO 131 O Yes x No MMC Command List Fostex Model D2424 Reference Manual MIDI Implementation Chart MMC List Command List Movement Recorder 01 STOP STOP 02 PLAY PLAY 03 DEFERRED PLAY DEFERRED PLAY 04 FAST FORWARD FFWD 05 REWIND REWIND 06 RECORD STROBE REC 07 RECORD EXIT PUNCH OUT 09 PAUSE STOP 40 WRITE Refer to MMC Response Information Field List 41 MASKED WRITE Refer to MMC Response Information Field List 42 READ Refer to MMC Response Information Field List 44 LOCATE LOCATE to Setting Data 46 SEARCH CUE REVIEW 1 60 times 47 SHUTTLE CUE REVIEW 1 60 times 4C MOVE Refer to MMC Response Information Field List 4D ADD Refer to MMC Response Information Field List 4E SUBTRACT Refer to MMC Response Information Field List MMC Response Information Field List 01 SELECTED TIME CODE Command READ WRITE MOVE ADD SUBTRACT 03 REQUESTED OFFSET READ WRITE 04 ACTUAL OFFSET READ 08 GP 0 READ WRITE MOVE ADD SUBTRACT 09 GP 1 READ WRITE MOVE ADD SUBTRACT 0A GP 2 READ WRITE MOVE ADD SUBTRACT OB GP 3 READ WRITE MOVE ADD SUBTRACT 0C GP 4 READ WRITE MOVE ADD SUBTRACT 0D GP 5 READ WRITE MOVE ADD SU
189. eous figure is used 14 04 mmc time Preroll time set command The command for setting the current program preroll time at the figure indicated by mmc time 14 06 frame rate gt Frame rate set command The command for setting the current program frame rate at the figure indicated by frame rate 14 08 time base Time base set command The command for setting the current program time base of this equipment to that indicated by time base The Status Hequest Command 22 21 loop operation status request The command inquiring the loop operation mode setup sta tus D2424 will reply with 32 21 loop op mode 12 gt 22 22 loop on off status request The command inquiring the loop on off ON OFF of AUTO RETURN setup status D2424 will reply with 32 22 on off 22 28 post locate status request The command inquiring the post locate mode ON OFF of AUTO PLAY setup status D2424 will reply with 32 28 post locate mode gt 22 2D auto rec status request The command inquiring the auto rec mode setup status and this is replied by 32 2D edit message gt Reply from D2424 against this status request will be either one of the following edit message 05 Possible to undo rehearsal mode 06 Possible to undo take mode 72 off 22 41 lock status request The command inquiring the slave on off setup status and the lock status D2424 will reply with 32 41 lock status 22 42
190. et the sampling frequency and bit resolution With the default setting 44 1kHz 24bit appears Refer to the table on page 31 and turn the JOG dial to select the desired setting Flashing Flashing 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2223 24 4 After you select the desired sampling frequency and bit resolution using the JOG dial press the EXECUTE YES key The recorder displays the screen which enables you to set the Multiple Undo function on or off 22 Flashing 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 224 5 After setting the multiple undo function on or off using the JOG dial press the EXECUTE YES key The recorder displays the screen which enables you to select the format type With the default setting Standard Format appears Be sure to select Standard Format to format an unformatted disk Flashing 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 28 24 6 Press and hold down the RECORD button and press the EXECUTE YES key The recorder starts formatting the disk and displays the size of the unformatted area on the target disk This value counts down as the formatting operation proceeds Wait until the format operation is complete REMAIN 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 serup COMPLETED oL 12 3 4 5 6 7 B 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Lit INT 7 After form
191. ex Setup of the Chain Play Mode Upon setup of the previous Chain Play List select the desired mode in the Chain Play MD Setup of the chain play mode menu in the same SETUP mode Note The chain play mode setting will be held even though power is switched off and if power is switched when the D2424 is set to pause mode the recorder will automatically execute chain play If chain play is no longer required reset to Off the Chain Play MD menu after ending chain play 1 Press the SETUP key while the D2424 is in the stop mode to switch to the SETUP display 2 Display the Chain Play MD menu via the JOG dial and then press the EXECUTE YES key The recorder will change to the display for setting up of the chain play mode and the present setup mode will flash In the initial setup Off will flash Susdescop LT Flashing Mmm HBLUS 3 Select the desired mode via the JOG dial When the JOG dial is rotated modes other than the currently shown Off listed below can be selected Off Pause Pause mode 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Refer to previous page 57 on the function of each mode Auto P Auto play mode Rpt Pepeat mode 4 Press the EXECUTE YES key after selecting the mode The recorder will exit from the SETUP mode after setup is completed In this step if it was completed in the setup other th
192. ext step Flashing 2 12 33 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Changing the bar at ABS 0 of the time base Bar in 002bar 1beat OOclk which indicates the head figure of the disk in the time base BAR BEAT CLK can be changed Although the initial figure is 002bar this can be set within the range of 009bar 002bar 1 Repeat steps 1 2 described in the Storing a time 4 Use the JOG dial to enter a new value signature section 5 Press the EXECUTE YES key 2 Turn the JOG dial counter clockwise to select 002 bar Offset 6 Press the EXIT NO key or STOP button 3 Press the EXECUTE YES key To cancel the setting operation or to exit SETUP mode 2 in o will flash S xU bar figure can be after storing data press the STOP button or the EXIT NO key Each time you press one of these keys the changed with the JOG dial Numbers that canbe input recorder returns to the previous hierarchy level of the ame menu and finally exits SETUP mode Flashing 9L pm 24 UOM Fs Iba CLOCK INT 2 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 108 Model D2424 Reference Manual Changing the Initial Settings SETUP mode FOStex Setting a tempo Tempo Map Set menu The Setting a tempo menu enables you to specify a tempo at a given point in a song that already has a time signature setting For example you can specify a tempo of 150 to t
193. ffset time difference against ABS time absolute time and output it as MTC in any desired frame rate It can also carry out the proper operation upon receiving an MMC and Fostex System Exclusive Message from outside In this case because the recorder can setup a DEVICE ID number by the SETUP mode MIDI Device ID Setting menu a multiple number of the unit s can be separately controlled by changing the DEVICE ID numbers in the transmitted message from the computer In regards to the corresponding content for MMC refer to the MMC list on page 132 and on the Fostex System Exclusive Message the Fostex Exclusive List on page VII Set the recorder in the initial state Confirm the program and sampling frequency MMC or Fostex System Exclusive Message MIDI OUT MIDI OUT silk kl FILLE X E FEH MIDI sound sources MIDI IN 77 FOStex Model D2424 Reference Manual MIDI Sync Function Connecting to external equipment Connect the recorder MIDI IN OUT to the computer with MIDI interface MIDI IN
194. ffset mode MTC offset mode status reply This is the reply against 23 48 MTC offset mode status re quest 33 49 lt count 3 gt on off vari data vari pitch status reply This is the reply against 23 49 vari pitch status request and is indicating the vari pitch function on off and the present vari pitch setup figure 34 01 signature map signature map status reply This is the reply against 24 01 event number signature map request The signature map of the event indicated by the event number is replied If there is no event specified Ex ample Such as when event number 5 is requested even though there is only 5 meters registered it will be replied with all figures at 00 of the signature map 142 34 02 tempo set map tempo set map status reply The reply against 24 02 lt event number tempo set map re quest Tempo set map of the event indicated by the event number is replied If there is no event specified Example Such as when event number 20 is requested although only 10 is setup for tempo it will be replied with all figures at 00 of the signature map 34 04 mmc time preroll set map status reply This is the reply against 34 04 preroll time status request and this is replied with the presently set preroll time 34 05 mmc time remain time reply This is the reply against 24 05 remain time request and is replied with the recordable disc remaining ti
195. for operating procedure and details 80 Model D2424 Reference Manual MIDI Sync Function FOStex 3 With the SETUP mode MTC offset mode setting whether the MTC offset time will be output ABS at the ABS 00h 00s 00f 00sf point or at the 001BAR 1BEAT OOCLK bar signature point of the tempo map is selected Refer to page 115 SETUP mode MTC offset mode setting for operating procedure and details 4 A random offset time is set by the SETUP mode MTC offset time setting Refer to page 114 SETUP mode MTC offset time setting for operating procedure and details 5 00 is set with the SETUP mode MIDI device ID setting Refer to page 120 SETUP mode MIDI device ID setting for operating procedure and details 6 Set to Int the clock setting by the SETUP mode Clock setting Refer to page 121 SETUP mode Clock setting for operating procedure and details 7 Press the DISP SEL key while holding down the SHIFT key to change the time base display to MTC Setup of the recorder 2 lt Slave 1 gt and 3 lt Slave 2 gt 1 Set the SETUP mode MTC Frame rate setting to the same frame rate as in the recorder 1 Refer to page 113 SETUP mode MTC Frame rate setting for operating procedure and details 2 Set the SETUP mode MTC offset mode setting to the same mode as in the recorder 1
196. format of the current drive will be displayed The display below indicates that the multiple undo function of the current drive presently in use is ON o BIT 24 HOM es TT Cas CLOCK INT 12 3 45 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 This indicates that the maximum figure is 5 for the number of audio file event and that this program is PGMO1 o E JOM Fs H HBl H chock E T 123 45 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 128 Model D2424 Reference Manual Changing the Initial Settings SETUP mode FOStex Drive Setting Drive Sel menu In D2424 in addition to the current drive E IDE hard disk for recording playback editing by installing the optional Model 9044 BAY CADDY an E IDE hard disk or optional Model 9046 DVD RAM drive and furthermore a SCSI drive for backup use can be connected and used In the Drive setup menu these drives can be selected in accordance to the use This is especially convenient to check the song data saved in the backup drive Even though a multiple number of drives are used the D2424 will normally start up from the current drive by re switching on the power Note By switching the drive setting to SCSI or IDE2 the saved song data can be confirmed by playing it back Since this playback is only to the extent of confirming the saved data it could create drop ou
197. g this function sound recorded in this recorder can be sent to external digital equipment MD DAT adat digital mixer in direct digital signals nitial setting adat Assignable digital signal adat adat digital signal SPDIF S P DIF digital signal This setting is shared by all Programs in the same disk The settings cannot be saved and loaded as part of the song data The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the recorder lt Function of the DATA OUTPUT connectors gt lt Setup for S P DIF digital signals gt When the digital output is set up for S P DIF all DATA OUTPUT connectors can be used Signals of tracks 1 2 are output from OUTPUT 1 8 the signals of tracks 3 4 from OUTPUT 9 16 and signals from tracks 5 6 from OUTPUT 17 24 lt Setup for adat digital signals gt When the digital output has also been setup for adat all DATA OUTPUT connectors can be used Signals of tracks 1 8 is output from OUTPUT 1 8 the signals of tracks 9 16 from OUTPUT 9 16 and signals from tracks 17 24 from OUTPUT 17 24 118 Model D2424 Reference Manual Changing the Initial Settings SETUP mode FOStex Setting digital output 1 While the recorder is stopped press the SETUP key to enter SETUP mode 2 Turn the JOG dial to select D out flashes then press the EXECUTE YES key The current digital output signal appears on the display Pressing the EXECUTE
198. ger save time you can edit the save time during save operations Go to page 87 Step 6 This can be done by either setting the save time to a longer save time however the maximum time that can be edited is 59 minutes 59 seconds or move the data with the longest recording time on the additional track to the real track and then save that data Be careful not to erase the data that you need on the additional track when conducting these procedures For more details on track exchange go to page 72 Notes on using the optional DVD RAM drive Model 9046 Please use the following disks for the DVD RAM media to be used in the optional DVD RAM drive Model 9046 You cannot save load correctly by using any other type disk listed here 2 6GB 4 7GB 5 2GB 9 4GB The headphone jack provided in the optional Model 9046 cannot be used Do not plug in the headphone Installation of Model 9046 must be done by the Fostex Service Department After purchasing this unit please request the nearest Fostex Service Station 86 Model D2424 Reference Manual Saving and Loading Song Data FOStex Saving the data using a adat or S P DIF digital signal S P DIF digital signal or adat digital signal from the DATA OUTPUT connector of the recorder is saved Restore the initial settings on the recorder Set the same sampling rate on the external digital device and the recorder Connecting an external device Connect DATA OUTPUT 1 8
199. ging tracks in any combination as shown below means that data recorded on those tracks will be relocated This function enables effective use of tracks Not only will it be possible to make exchanges between real tracks but by dumping a real track to a blank additional track another blank real track is created for future recording However since data in this additional track cannot be directly played back in real time if the data need to be played back or edited it must be moved to a real track Also as explained in the previous Erase Track Exchange is necessary when checking REC END in the additional track Exchange in 8 track units Exchange in 2 track stereo pair units Exchange in mono track units Exchange in 8 track units Execution of Track Exchange 1 In the stop mode press the EDIT key to display TRK Exch Mono or TRK Exch Group Select TRK Exch Group to exchange tracks in 2 track Flashing stereo pair 8 track units and TRK Exch Mono to exchange in mono track units Exchanging in mono units T BU 12 E WIS Exchanging in group units 532345 6 7 8 9 10111219 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21222324 Flashing 2 After either is displayed press the EXECUTE i BH FS YES key Eo eroek The display will change to selecting the tracks for z 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 E exchanged To actually select the tracks p
200. hange in accordance to the first bar setting for signature and tempo For example it will be long if the tempo is set slow This mode can be effectively applied when using the MIDI clock and MTC in parallel and when using MTC for the sync signal while controlling the recorder with time base BAR BEAT CLK Confirming MTC sync MMC 1 During recording and at playback after recording time base MTC is displayed according to the setting and MTC is output at the same time Check that the recorder traveling position MTC and the traveling position of the sequence software in sync are matched 2 Send MMC commands such as PLAY STOP and LOCATE from the sequence software to see that the recorder will be properly controlled When a correct MIDI command MMC or FEX is received MIDI in the display will be lit for about 40msec There is no setting in the recorder to receive MMC or FEX but it will operate if a correct MIDI signal is input f sync and control cannot be done correctly re check connections cables and the setting of both equipment Execution of recording Carry out various recordings while synchronizing the recorder and a MIDI sequencer with the MIDI clock 79 FOStex Model D2424 Reference Manual MIDI Sync Function Multitrack system by the slave mode An example of how to make a multitrack system by interconnecting three recorders in a slave mode function will be explained in the following
201. have more will increase recordable space on the disk AUTO PUNCH OUT point AUTO PUNCH IN point AUTO PUNCH OUT point AUTO PUNGEINIpoiNt i aay Any real track J rece Erase Any real track Silence ABS 0 REC END Any real track Any real track Silence lt Note gt If all real tracks contain data as shown below erasing data on tracks 1 and 2 will not affect the position of REC END On the other hand if all Real tracks contain data as shown below erasing data on tracks 3 6 will move up REC END to the end point of tracks 1 and 2 AUTO PUNCH OUT point AUTO PUNCH OUT point ABSO AUTO iod IN point REC END ABS 0 AUTO PUNCH IN point REC END Tik6 Trk5 Trk4 Trk3 Trk2 Trk 1 Trk6 Trk 5 Trk 4 Trk3 Trk2 Trk1 Real tracks Real tracks Trk6 Tik5 Real tracks Trk4 Trk3 Trk2 Trk1 Tk 6 Tk 5 Trk 4 Tk 3 Trk2 Trk1 Erase Erase Real tracks Erase Erase Erase Erase ABS 0 REC END ABS 0 REC END Follow the steps below to erase data Storing the edit points Store the erase start point AUTO PUNCH IN point EEE 1 and the erase end point AUTO PUNCH OUT 1 Refer to the Storing and editing the locate points pot to the memory keys section for information on l storing the erase start and end points Store the
202. he data to a DAT or adat In this way multiple consecutive audio files are optimized into one continuous audio file in some cases Set the Clipboard In point and the Clipboard Out points within an unrecorded range to copy the area the area that contains multiple audio files and you wish to optimize between them then paste the data starting from the same Clipboard In point Multiple audio files within this range will become a single audio file lt Hints gt Make sure that you set the Clipboard In Out points within zero files and that you paste the area starting from the same Clipboard In point In any case bear in mind that you cannot reduce the excessive number of events if the target range contains a zero file 30 Model D2424 Reference Manual Formatting and Optimizing Disks FOStex Formatting and Optimizing Disks This section describes how to format and optimize a current drive disk and a backup disk You can also find information regarding formatting and optimizing the disks in the Quick Operation Guide and in the Saving and Loading Song Data section of this manual Formatting a current drive disk Before you format a current drive disk specify the sampling frequency and bit data resolution Multiple Undo on off and format type parameters Refer to the table below for more information on these settings Detailed formatting parameters Sampling Frequency 44 1kHz 48kHz 88 2kHz 96kHz Turn this f
203. he third beat of the 12th measure Time signature and tempo settings make a Tempo Map which is used by the recorder to manage the song using the BAR BEAT CLK Time Base and enable the Metronome function Tempo settings as well as time signature settings are required when you wish to output MIDI clock and Song Position Pointer to an external sequencer lt Note gt The tempo set figure setup here is an approximate figure and not 100 accurate Therefore although the tempo map be matched to a personal computer they will gradually drift apart In order to prevent this drift the personal computer side can be set to either MIDI Clock Sync or the MIDI sync output signal temporarily set to MIDI Clock the figure reset to the accurate tempo and then return again to MTC sync Initial setting bar 001 beat 1 e Setting range of measures e Setting range of beats 120 001 bar 1 beat 120 tempo Determined by the time signature setting Determined by the time signature setting e Setting range of tempo 30 250 quarter note delete Max setting points 64 points You can set the tempo for each Program individually The settings can be saved and loaded as part of song data The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the recorder Checking the stored tempo setting 1 Select a Program to check the tempo setting for 2 Rotate the JOG dial clockwise Press the SETUP key use the JOG dial
204. hen automatically locate the AUTO RTN START point as shown in the diagram below To enable this function AUTO RTN mode should be on and the AUTO RTN START point and AUTO RTN END point should already be set 2 Press the AUTO RTN AUTO PLAY key to turn on lt Note gt If the Chain Play mode in the SETUP mode is set other the AUTO RTN LED than Off ON OFF of AUTO RETURN cannot be ex O AUTO RTN ecuted AUTO PLAY CJ lt Operation of the Auto Return mode gt m AUTO RTN START pont AUTO RTN END point 3 Start playback a little before the AUTO RTN END M 4 point l The recorder operates as shown in the diagram ros PLAYBACK gt i P e You can set a preroll time in the Preroll Time menu sroP HRS in SETUP mode so that the recorder will start playback Automatic locating to the AUTO RTN START point preroll time before the locate point You can set the subsequent to playback to the AUTO RTN END point preroll time from 0 to 10 seconds Refer to the chapter Changing the Initial Settings SETUP Mode on page 112 1 Store the AUTO RTN START and AUTO RTN END points Refer to the chapter Storing a Locate Point Edit Point on page 50 for information on storing the desired points in the AUTO RTN START key and the AUTO RTN END key 93 Fostex Model D2424 Reference Manual Locate Function Auto Repeat function The Auto Repeat function allows the recorder to repeat playback up to
205. hods for monitoring track sound only on the Real tracks input monitoring and playback monitoring They are defined as follows Input monitoring Input monitoring means to listen to what is being input to the recorder so that you can verify sound quality and etc Either one of the following procedure is used to input monitor any Real Track or all Real Tracks Entering any Real Track to input monitoring _ To enter any desired track for Input Monitoring press the The following example shows track 5 in Input Monitoring desired RECORD TRACK select key to enter itin the READY mode and other tracks in Playback Monitoring mode mode and then press the RECORD button If the RECORD button is pressed again the recorder will enter the repro mode The recorder will enter record standby mode and the READY track only will be Input Monitoring Tacks The recording level can now be adjusted Entering all Real Tracks to input monitoring Keyboard p gt Mixer section TET Monitoring To enter all Real Tracks to input monitoring press the an sd TRACK SHIFT key while holding down the SHIFT key ERST Unlike the previous case of selecting any desired track Real Tracks can all be input monitored even though the BE RECORD button is not pressed After adjusting the recording level to simultaneously start recording all tracks enter all tracks in the READY mode by pressing th
206. ifications section of this Reference Manual Do not use an AC outlet of any other voltage e Do not connect the recorder to the same AC outlet to which devices that could generate noise such as a large motor or dimmer or the devices that consume a large amount of power such as an air conditioning system or large electric heater are connected e If you use the recorder in an area with a different power voltage first consult your dealer or the nearest FOSTEX service station You can use the recorder with a power frequency of 50Hz or 60Hz e t is very dangerous to use a power cord that is frayed or damage In such a case stop using the recorder immediately and ask your dealer to repair the cord e To avoid possible electric shock and damage to the recorder avoid contact with water or other liquids or do not handle the power plug while your hands are wet e To prevent possible electric shock and damage to the recorder do not remove the main unit cover or reach the inside the unit Do not let water or other liquid or metal objects such aspins accidentally enter the inside of the recorder because this may lead to electric shock or damage Should water enter the inside of the recorder remove the power plug from the AC outlet and consult your dealer or the nearest FOSTEX service station e To prevent damage to the recorder be sure to power on the connected devices first then turn on the power to the recorder Before
207. igure will be displayed MTC IN display Ei E 2 E 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 If you press the DISP SEL key again the screen will return to the ABS TIME display 4 Switching the Time Base display using the SHIFT key and DISP SEL key When the screen is showing the ABS TIME or REMAIN display if you press the DISP SEL key repeatedly whileholding down the SHIFT key the TIME BASE display will change cyclically You can select one of the following Time Base displays 21 ABS time base rj mL we ET UU UU Uo L oL I Pom m a uon FD Lime o o 3 H 2 Ei E o H 2 1 18 CLOCK 1 INT E 2 pU 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 2324 MTC time base wc Do ssg srrt WT y E 2 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Changing Programs using the PGM key lt Note gt Such operations as program compilation and selecting will only functions when the Chain Play MD menu in the SETUP mode is Off In regards to the Chain Play MD menu in the SETUP mode see page 57 About the Program Change function The Program Change function divides the hard disk space into up to 99 parts to accommodate 99 separate Programs PO1 P99 as long as available recording time allows so you can record play back edit and reachieve save and load data for each Program in
208. ile on the disk Press the EXECUTE YES key and proceed to Step 7 When saved to the disk this WAV file will be additionally recorded Alternate display of Title amp New PGM and AHHEMB Disk capacity is short by the amount of to be able to add a new WAV file Press the EXECUTE YES key and after display of Disk Full Delete All WAV is displayed then press the EXECUTE YES key again and it will go to Step 7 for deleting all WAV files on the backup disk After save only saved WAV files will be recorded Fostex Model D2424 Reference Manual Saving and Loading Song Data Title amp MB display In this instance the selected WAV file on the backup disk is deleted and there is now enough capacity to make a WAV file Press the EXECUTE YES key and DEL delete of WAV file will be displayed and when EXECUTE YES key is pressed again it will go to Step 7 for deleting the selected WAV file on the backup disk After save the selected WAV file will be replaced as the new file and recorded on the disk Title amp MB display The disk is short of capacity by the amount of to be able to make a WAV file although the selected WAV file on the backup disk is deleted If the EXECUTE YES key is pressed after display of Disk Full Delete All WAV is displayed and when the EXECUTE YES key is pressed again it will go to Step 7 for deleting all WAV files on the backup disk After save on
209. ill be interrupted and the recorder will also stop CHASE in the display will change from lit to blinking 3 During FF REW of the sequence software the recorder will remain stopped but upon starting to record the recorder will immediately chase lock Note Chase lock of the recorder by MTC only is permissible when speed difference of the MTC from the master is within 5 6 Against the MTC within this range variable pitch will be constantly applied internally for chasing Chase lock however will not function against MTC at a speed difference outside this range Also when the master speed difference is large it is advised to let the recorder learn the master speed by entering PLAY prior to recording By doing so it will be lock faster from the second and later sessions Should it not be possible to chase lock re check connections cables and all settings Execution of recording E Carry out various recordings while the recorder is chase locked to the sequence software lt One Point Advice gt Sync signal Free of the Slave mode setting menu When the recorder is made to chase lock by MTC only variable pitch will be constantly applied by external MTC If a digital signal is output to an external digital equipment from the recorder it will not be able to follow the speed difference MTC speed difference of the master of the recorder and the external digital equipment in some cases may not be able
210. in input All tracks are in playback monitoring monitoring playback monitoring E mode The sound is not recorded at mode Rehearsing Manual Punch In Out this ime The RECORD button lamp flashes N In Rehearsal mode the READY track enters input Press the foot switch at the Press the foot switch at the monitoring mode between the Punch In and Out Punch In point Punch Out point points the points at which you press the foot switch and the sound is not recorded You can 6 When you finish rehearsing press the STOP practice the Punch In Out operation repeatedly button before you proceed to actual recording If you are still unsatisfied repeat steps 3 5 1 Press the foot switch while holding down the Cancelling Rehearsal mode STOP button A Rehearsal On will appear on the display or about 1 1 While holding down the STOP button press the second then rehearsal mode will appear and the foot switch REHEARSAL LED green of the AUTO PUNCH key flashes The display shows Rehearsal Off for 1 second then the flashing REHEARSAL LED turns off and cancels the PUNCH REHEARSAL rehearsal mode LJ a lt Hint gt To rehearse repeatedly set the AUTO RTN START point 2 Press the RECORD TRACK select key 3 11 19 slightly before the Punch In point and the AUTO RTN to set track 3 to READY END point slightly before the Punch Out point This will help you concentrate on your performance or check the reco
211. information about Multiple Undo function 15 25 Play button PLAY Pressing this button will cause the recorder to play back Pressing this button while holding down the RECORD button will start recording Pressing this button while holding down the STOP button will perform the Clipboard playback operation Refer to the section STOP button for more information on the Clipboard playback Pressing the PLAY button during recording will stop recording 26 Setup key SETUP TC GEN Press this key to puts the recorder in the SETUP mode to execute various operations This key works when the recorder is stopped To exit from the SETUP mode either press the EXIT NO key or the STOP button If the optional Model 8345 TC SYNC card is installed and external time code is being input you can enter the generator setup mode by pressing this key while pressing on the SHIFT key Refer to page 105 for more information on SETUP mode Refer to APPENDIX for more information about generator setup mode 27 Stop button STOP Pressing this button will stop the transport section of the recorder Pressing the PLAY REWIND or F FWD button while holding down this button will cause the recorder to perform the following operation STOP button PLAY button Clipboard playback The STOP LED will flash and the PLAY LED willlight up 1 STOP button REWIND button Locate ABS 0 2 STOP button
212. ing MIDI Sync Output Signal nel endete ert esaet nia eaa oet Fey Cu vL a va REEL THER HER EEEE E ced INE eR a TER vae 113 Set ne an MTC Frame CRISE TE 113 Setting an MTC Offset EDUC Oa aS 114 SETHE Offset MO oC 115 SeLting Lhe Slave Dy pC viscceceasssedvsscecdetsseeevszeesed a a aa raaa detest sdesei duvet debsdies sieve aa a aaO a E Douitedecasevelicc M 116 Setting the Record Protect LUMCUON os scvesccsvecseececceseecstsactsscesuecosaevecasai tueaseccesavestettacachecseesatelisezsteusstsazacuaeetes 116 Setting Digital ino 117 Sette Digital Eja c 118 Setting BAR BEAT Resolution MOGe 7 eite ores end xe ra Free de aeta bro an oa raa AEAEE REEERE EESE aaia 119 setine he MIDI Device NUPImbGE 5 ianea oet coran eventi dee servet sane euis sae essi eei vu pes irae tete t ens senis edo 120 Setting the Operating ClOCK in eiie Leto et er etae abso co eaa HUE EYE Fo e E Yee e NE eU ER ERES REN FREE ER ER edna nents 121 Checking the Number of Track EVents iii itn eeee eee te ee che epe eR LIB EHE ORENSE NER RAN HAIR E PR obs ERAN EAR FRE riaria piia 122 Setup OF the Auto EE MOG Css ces oit iieri etre Peas e ee cve resur d yen Ca eee oer vivae teg bu eb ee rever dae eade tego 123 Setup of the Foot switch fUNCtiONn eee esssesssseessecessecessecsseecsseeessecesesessecseeecsseeessecesseeeseecseesessteseaeeeseeees 123 Setup
213. ing WAV files saved in a multiple number of disks they can be loaded by a special method derived from the above method Assume that there is backup disc 1 saved with 01 WAV through 12 WAV and disc 2 saved with 13 WAV through 24 WAV First when backup disk 1 is loaded files in tracks 1 12 will be loaded At this point tracks 13 24 will not be loaded and thus be non recorded Next when backup disk 2 is loaded files in tracks 1 12 remains intact and tracks 13 24 only will be loaded Backup Disk 1 Backup Disk 1 Method in loading by changing the track If the two letters in file name WAV in the backup disk are changed it will be possible to load them on this recorder on a track different from that at the initial save For example if a WAV file named ABCDEF01 WAV on track 1 is changed to ABCDEF03 WAV this WAV file will be loaded on track 3 Method in loading by changing the title If the 6 letters in file name WAV in the backup disk are changed it will be possible to load them on this recorder under a title different from that at the first save Letters which can be used at changing the file name in a computer are those only indicated below All of these letters must be one byte size Alphabets A Z and a z Numerals 0 9 Symbols B E amp 104 Model D2424 Reference Manual Changing the Initial Setti
214. ing an adat or DAT Tracks 1 8 1 16 1 24 1 32 1 40 1 48 1 56 9 16 9 24 9 32 9 40 9 48 9 56 17 24 17 32 17 40 17 48 17 56 25 32 25 40 25 48 25 56 33 40 33 48 33 56 When using a SCSI IDE2 gt PO1 P99 or All program gt All tracks 1 56 will be automatically selected 1 Press the SETUP key The recorder will enter the SETUP mode 2 Use the JOG dial to select Save PGM will flash and press the EXECUTE YES key The indication of the type of digital signal to be saved will flash on the display oL OL Bm 24 UO es gum te CLOCK INT Flashing BIT 24 ures AO LPs CLOCK INT 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 3 Rotate the JOG dial to select a flashing SCSI 6 and press the EXECUTE YES key SURE flashes It will change to the display for selecting the backup mode FDMS3 or WAVE In the example here FDMS3 is flashing Flashing IOM Fs L knz CLOCK ie 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 4 Press the EXECUTE YES key It will change to the display for selecting the program to be saved At this point when the JOG dial is rotated in addition to separate programs Save All can be selected When Save All is selected all the programs can be saved Read explanation in following Depending on the selected program the display will be as follows 93
215. ing completion of the move paste operation 32 4E edit message 01 completed gt will be sent If paste cannot be executed due to improper figures of the previously registered auto punch in point insufficient disc ca pacity no sound data is in the clipboard etc the correspond ing edit message will be replied 12 4F lt channel gt lt channel gt track exchange command When the D2424 receives this command the track can be ex change between the specified lt channel gt lt channel gt Especially if the first lt channel 00 gt lt channel 01 gt then exchange by grouping will be executed between channel 1 8 and channel 17 24 and if the next byte lt channel 00 gt lt channel 02 gt then the exchange will be between channel 9 16 and channel 17 24 If it cannot be executed for some reason an error mes sage will be sent back 13 3E product new program command When the D2424 receives this command a new program is compiled and the current program is transferred to the new program As compilation of the new program is comparatively short time it is replied with 33 3E edit message 01 com pleted gt immediately upon completion of execution If it cannot be executed for some reason an error message will be sent back 13 3F delete current program command When the D2424 receives this command the current program is deleted and succeeding programs moved up and renumberd If the deleted program is the only tune
216. ings SETUP mode FOStex Setting the Metronome function Click menu Setting the Metronome function menu allows you to determine whether or not the recorder outputs a metronome sound from Real track track 24 during playback or recording Turning the Metronome function on enables you to record your performance while playing the instrument accompanying the metronome sound lt Notes gt The metronome sound is output from track 24 in the D2424 When the metronome function is switched ON the metronome sound cannot be recorded on the output track nor can the recorded sound be played back However in a D2424 formatted in 96kHz 24bit 8 track or 88 2kHz 24bit 8 track as the metronome sound will be output from track 24 real tracks1 8 can all be used for record playback nitial setting Off Option Off or On You can turn the function on and off for each Program individually The settings cannot be saved and loaded as part of the song data The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the recorder Setting the Metronome function 1 While the recorder is stopped press the SETUP 3 Turn the JOG dial to select On or Off key to enter SETUP mode Selecting On will enable the output of the metronome sound Selecting Off initial setting will disable the 2 Turn the JOG dial to select Click flashes ENS then press the EXECUTE YES key
217. ion to each backup number Load All can be selected All programs can be loaded when Load All is selected 95 COMPLETED will turn off lt Note gt You cannot abort a load operation on a SCSI device while it is in progress FOSteX Model D2424 Reference Manual Saving and Loading Song Data Loading data saved on several removable disks As an example here we will load the data of a Program saved onto two removable disks 1 Insert the first disk Disk 1 into the SCSI device 5 Insert Disk 2 second disk into the SCSI hard disk drive according to what the display requests Note Loading automatically resumes when Disk 2 is inserted Make sure that you insert the disks in the correct order If you insert the wrong disk the recorder The display will show the same count down as shown displays Wrong disk gt Illegal No and ejects the for Disk 1 The size of the program is counted down disk Follow the disk markings you made during the along with the load process save operation When all data is loaded COMPLETED lights up and the program time base ABS 0 started up prior to going 2 Follow Steps 1 3 of the Loading Song data into the SETUP mode will appear procedure The display flashes the number of the existing Backup data in the SCSI disk and then indicates that the first disk has been inserted Note You cannot abort a load operation on a SCSI device while it is in prog
218. ions Sofa rug or similar surface that may block the ventilation All other servicing should be referred to qualified service openings or placed in a built in installation such as a bookcase personnel or cabinet that may impede the flow of air through the ventilation openings Model D2424 Reference Manual Safety Instruction Contents FOStex Main SIS MET IRE UR m 7 eeN 9 t RR NT REOR E E E A E A E A EET SA 8 Names and Functions Front panel SCCUON aanne A A T E E M 10 Detachable controller SeCtion c titii en trc eie eee ettet e E Ea Era SR ECEE ERRATEA T1 Rear panel secliQi iecit eteicet teri teesie ertum ctn fe eere ERE RUIRE E INR AIRL HEEL eTA E EE E aS e A NEAS 18 Display SOCIO e tence 19 Display shown when the power is turned On eeeseeeeeeee eese tette tne tn ttn tn estne tnt etn estne sn erisedi 19 Kiwi M E A EE E E EEE EEE M 20 Switching the display using the DISP SEL Key e eeeeeeeeeeeeee esee eene tenen tnnt teens SRESER ATAR EER S 21 Switching the time base display using the SHIFT key and DISP SEL key eese 21 Changing programs using the PGM Key eese esee esses eene eee tn tnn tnetn inuia tns nandi ae s enetn eaaet 21 Warning display none srakun EE Q 22 Before Starting MIME BA e M H 24
219. ironment this could be affected by generation of noise in some cases FOSTEX DISTRIBUTORS LIST INEUROPE Including non EU countries underlined contracted distributors as of August 2000 lt AUSTRIA gt NAME ATEC Audio u Videogeraete VertriebsgesmbH ADD Im Winkel 5 A 2325 Velm Austria TEL 443 2234 74004 FAX 443 2234 74074 lt BELGIUM gt NAME EML Sound Industries NV ADD Bijvennestraat 1A B3500 Hasselt Belgium TEL 32 11 232355 FAX 32 11 232172 lt DENMARK gt NAME SC Sound ApS ADD Malervej 2 DK 2630 Taastrup Denmark TEL 45 4399 8877 FAX 45 4399 8077 FINLAND NAME Noretron Oy Audio ADD P O Box 22 FIN 02631 Espoo Finland TEL 358 9 5259330 FAX 4358 9 52593352 FRANCE NAME Musikengro ADD ZAC de Folliouses B P 609 01706 Les Echets France TEL 33 472 26 27 00 FAX 433 472 26 27 01 GERMANY NAME Studio sound amp Music GmbH ADD Industriestrasse 20 D 35041 Marburg F R Germany TEL 49 6421 92510 FAX 49 6421 925119 lt GREECE gt NAME Bon Studio S A ADD 6 Zaimi Street Exarchia 106 83 Athens Greece TEL 30 1 3809605 8 3302059 FAX 30 1 3845755 lt ICELAND gt NAME I D elrf electronic Ltd ADD ARMULA 38 108 REYKJAVIK ICELAND TEL 354 588 5010 FAX 354 588 5011 lt ITALY gt NAME General Music S p A ADD Via delle Rose 12 S Giovanni M RN Italy TEL 39 0541
220. is displayed and then returned to the display prior to entering the edit mode Whether Exch 01 09 or Exch 09 01 is input there will be no difference in the fact that track 1 and track 9 have been exchanged Note You cannot select the same track for left and right If the same track is mistakenly specified Select Err will be displayed for an instant and then returned to the display prior to execution As it stands data in the additional track cannot be played back or REC END confirmed To do this data must be moved temporarily onto a real track When saving the data to an external DAT adat or SCSI data on the additional track will be saved in its original state and when reloading will be reinstalled on the disk the same as prior to saving it 73 Fostex Model D2424 Reference Manual Editing Tracks Registering the Track name Any type of track name can be registered or edited for each real track additional track In general after the current drive is formatted a Temporary title 7 TRACK 1 etc is automati cally registered for all tracks This temporary title can be changed and registered as you wish using the Track Name Edit menu in the SETUP mode For example to allow checking at a glance sound sources guitar keyboard vocal etc recorded on each track a maximum 8 digit track name can be registered such as Guitar for track 1 Keyboard for track 2 Vocal for
221. is setup check the following in the recorder 2 and 3 Blinking of CHASE in the display This will change to constant lit upon completing chase lock in later operation EXT and WORD are lit in the display This means it is externally synchronized against the input word clock signal Check chase lock 1 When the master recorder 1 is played back MTC IN LED of the slave recorder 2 and 3 will be lit CHASE in the display will immediately change from blinking to lit and chase lock will be completed Check that the MTC time on display are same in both master and slave units 2 When the master starts recording the slave will also start recording upon completing chase lock 3 When the master is stopped the slave will also stop as MTC from the master will be interrupted CHASE in the display will change from lit to blinking 4 During FF REW the master only will be in the FF REW mode and the slaves will remain stopped but when playback recording is started the slaves will immediately chase lock Note The unit re chase window is fixed at 10 frame In other words when MTC of the master and slave drifts apart more than 10 frames it will assume that chase lock is disengaged and the slave will match the position again with the master re chase operation During the re chase operation sound output will be muted If the drift is within 10 frames the slave will recognize this and continue
222. k into the drive 3 Press the SETUP key to enter the Setup mode 4 Turn the JOG dial to select Disk Format flashes and press the EXECUTE YES key IDE1 flashes appears E js 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Flashing 1 2345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 CAUTION If format is executed while IDE1 is blinking the internal IDE hard disk will be formatted and data in the IDE hard disk will be lost 5 Rotate the JOG dial to display the flashing SCSI6 and press the EXECUTE YES key The ID number and name of the connected SCSI device appear on the display and and SURE flash Flashing Flashing 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 6 Press the EXECUTE YES key The 24bit Backup flashing message appears and SURE flashes This indicates that you are in the stand by mode to format the backup purpose SCSI hard disk in the 24 bit Backup Format Quantization figure identical to the current drive will be displayed Flashing Flashing ol Bir EJ f1rs Sets 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 92 The backup format quantization display In the initial setup the backup format quantization that is displayed in the previous procedure will always be of the same figure as that of the current drive quantization This is due to the fact that
223. k is ejected then a prompt to Insert Disk will appear on the display Insert another disk When inserting a disk that was used as the current drive Wrong Disk will briefly appear the Disk Format menu of the SETUP mode will appear for backup formatting then the following indication will appear If it is okay to proceed formatting then execute the formatting process as done in the above case If it is not okay to proceed formatting then turn the JOG dial to select Eject to eject the disk The save operations can automatically be resumed in such manner when the disk is formatted as a backup disk or when a program is deleted 94 Model D2424 Reference Manual Saving and Loading Song Data FOStex Notes on saving all programs in several disks disk but programs beyond 6 had to be saved in another disk indicate what program is stored in it In the previous procedure when the left and right numbers were different such as 05 08 in the display of Save AII it could not be saved in one disk and indicated that a multiple number of disks were required For example if save was executed while Save AII 05 08 was displayed programs 1 5 could be saved in the first In this case if save is continued in the second disk the same BO1 backup number 01 for the first disk will be attached and saved In other words if All save is executed in a multiple number of disks backup number
224. ke This is quite different from the Single Undo Redo function Completion Completion Completion Completion Completion Completion data and time data and time data and time data and time data and time data and time of Take 1 of Take 2 of Take 3 of Take 4 of Take 5 of Take 6 Time axis Notes regarding the Multiple Undo operation e The time stamp of each take references to the internal clock of the recorder Therefore after formatting the current drive disk be sure to set the internal clock correctly Refer to the Quick Operation Guide for more information on how to set the internal clock e Recording or editing more takes will consume more disk space on a current drive disk that was formatted with the Multiple Undo function turned on This is because more disk space is required to enable the Undo function for any take Therefore such a current drive disk with a smaller capacity may not have enough disk space to perform the Multiple Undo function In this case performing the disk optimization in Setup mode may increase the free space available for the Undo function For more information see the Helpful Tips on page 65 e If you use the Multiple Undo function you cannot use the Single Undo Redo function e If you try to use the Multiple Undo function on a current drive disk that was formatted with the Multiple Undo function turned off the recorder displays Void and ignores your operation 64 Model D2424 Referen
225. ked is expressed as 1 33 42 lt channel gt lt channel gt digital out channel status reply 33 42 lt channel 7F gt lt channel 00 gt adat out status reply This is the reply against the 23 42 digital out ch st request The first channel indicates the track number assigned to the L channel output of the digital audio signal S P DIF from the DATA OUT connector and the second channel the track number as signed to the R channel output If digital out is set to Adat the reply for the first channel will be 7F and that for the second channel will be 00 33 43 program program status reply This is the reply against the 23 43 program status request program indicates the presently operating program num ber 33 44 lt on off gt click status reply This is the reply against the 23 44 click status request It indicates the on off setting of the metronome function 33 45 countz10 level data level status reply This is the reply against the 23 45 level status request and it indicates the present track 1 16 output level data In D2424 as level data is updated 40msec it will be effective if inquiry is made in 40msec units 33 46 lt on off gt bar beat resolution status reply This is the reply against 23 46 bar beat resolution status request 33 47 midi sync midi sync out status reply This is the reply against 23 47 midi sync out status request 33 48 MTC o
226. l be pasted back to the copy or move source tracks 2 Press the EDIT key repeatedly until Copy Clip or Move Clip flashes on the display Select Copy Clip to execute Copy amp Paste Select Move Clip to execute Move amp Paste E E 2 123456 7 8 9 101112 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 2324 3 Press the EXECUTE YES key The copy or move operation will complete immediately The display briefly indicates COMPLETED then flashes the Copy Paste or Move Paste message The recorder enters standby mode for the paste operation The indicates small square of the selected RECORD TRACK select keys continue to flash lt Notes gt Pressing the EXECUTE YES key without selecting track in Step 1 will cause the display to indicate an alarm message Select TRK Select a track then press the EXECUTE YES key e If an Output point has been specified before the In point the In point value is the same or large than the Out point value the display will show the error message Void In Point or Void Out Point and the return to the previous screen In this case set the correct In Out points and try again to copy or move the data Now the sound data to be pasted has been copied or moved to the clipboard you can check the data on the clipboard by following the steps below If there is no problem with the data you can proceed to the paste operation Checki
227. lease refer to the next page 22 Model D2424 Reference Manual Editing Tracks FOSt X Exchanging in group track units Exchange in mono track units 1 By pressing the EXECUTE YES key after TRK 1 Upon display of the previously mentioned TRK Exch Group is displayed the display will change as shown below This display is indicating that at present tracks 1 8 and 9 16 can be exchanged is indicating the track name of the flashing track left two digits In this example Name of track 01 Flashing 30 2 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 2 If the JOG dial is rotated while 01 08 is flashing the 8 track unit numbers 09 16 17 24 25 32 83 40 41 48 49 56 or pair track unit numbers 01 02 03 04 55 56 will be alternately displayed 3 After selecting the left side track press the NEXT key to move to the flashing right side Flashing o 3 H 3 H 18 Ei 30 CLOCK ml INT 4 Display the desired track by rotating the JOG dial in the same manner as Step 2 If the flashing display is to be moved from right to left either press the REV key or rotate the SHUTTLE dial 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 5 After selecting the left right tracks press the EXECUTE YES key Track exchange is executed and simultaneous with completion COMPLETED is displayed The D2424 will then
228. lect function Setting the digital input EEE MIH Set up the digital signal to be input and the digital in clock at the setup mode Setup of digital inputs menu The setting of digital input is initially set to Analog and digital signals cannot be input In order to record external digital signals SP DIF Async SP DIF Sync adat Async or adat Sync should be setup in accordance to the purpose SPDIF Async S P DIF digital signals from DATA INPUT 1 8 will be assigned to tracks 1 and 2 and the digital equip ment is synchronized with the internal clock of the D2424 SPDIF Sync S P DIF digital signals from DATA INPUT 1 8 will be assigned to tracks 1 and 2 and will be synchro nized with the S P DIF digital signals from the exter nal digital equipment adat Async adat digital signals from DATA INPUT 1 8 9 16 and 17 24 will be assigned to tracks 1 8 9 16 and 17 24 respectively and the digital equipment syn chronized with the internal clock of D2424 adat Sync adat digital signals from DATA INPUT 1 8 9 16 and 17 24 will be assigned to tracks 1 8 9 16 and 17 24 respectively and synchronized with the adat digital signals from the external digital equipment Refer to page 117 for setup of D in If digital input is set to Analog SPDIF Async or adat Async the SETUP mode Clock Sel setup of operating clock must be set up No
229. lock received from Sel menu The display will show Clock Sel D in indicating that the clock is set to Digital In and WORD IN the recorder ignores your operation Checking the number of track events NOs Event menu The Checking the number of track events menu enables you to check the number of events on each track Each track including Additional tracks of recorder Programs consists of consecutive audio files and zero files The number of events represents the total number of audio files and O files Each track can contain up to 512 events If you are editing a song of typical length about six minutes repeated editing operation does not usually cause this maximum number to be exceeded Exceeding this limit is called event number overflow Even a 20 minute song will not cause event number overflow This is because the recorder system always optimizes the data structure by keeping the number of events low However if a recording on a track is scattered in different areas of the disk or if you have made a very long recording on a single track and performed many edits you should be wary of event number overflow To avoid this problem use the Checking the number of track events menu to check the number of events on each track prior to recording or editing Checking the number of track events 1 While the recorder is stopped press the SETUP key to enter SETUP mode Q BT 24 uo es HBUS CLOCK INT
230. ly saved WAV files will be recorded Notes e If you attempt to save a WAV file with the same file name as one already existing on the backup disk Already Exist Same file name already exists is displayed and save will not be executed In this case change the WAV file name by the previous Step 7 In a disk which had been repeatedly saved by overwriting access speed could be lowered due to file fragmentation We recommend that you use a disk immediately after formatting for backup purposes In a save requiring a multiple number of backup disks if the backup disc already saved with programs is used Delete All WAV Delete of all WAV files will be displayed due to Disk Full and all WAV files will be deleted For save on multiple number of disks we recommend that you use a disk immediately after formatting When files and folders other than file names eem WAV which can be acknowledged by this recorder are made on the backup disk by using a computer in some cases save cannot be completed as it cannot calculate the accurate remaining capacity of the backup disk Great care should be taken when changing file names and making folders by a computer Loading WAV files WAV files will be loaded Prior to this make sure the backup disk is connected to the SCSI ID6 equipment The following explains how to use a backup disk in which WAV files were saved by this unit Loading from the E IDE hard disk for backup or the opti
231. m exists and you try to delete it data contained in the Program will be deleted but the Program itself will remain If you try to deleted PGM 05 only the For example assume that PGM 01 07 exist and you try to delete data of PGM 05 will be deleted and the PGM 05 Program number 05 will remain but the data inside PGM data of PGM 06 will move into PGM 05 05 will be replaced with the data of PGM 06 The subsequent Programs data will move in the same way After deleted Therefore it will appear that PGM 07 has been deleted If you delete the last Program PGM 07 in this example PGM 07 P02 PO3 will be completely deleted If you try to deleted PGM 05 only the data of PGM 05 will be deleted and the data of PGM 06 will move into PGM 05 Note You cannot use the Single Undo Redo function and Multiple Undo function to delete Programs Make sure that you delete the correct Program 3T Fostex Model D2424 Reference Manual Handling Programs 1 Press the SETUP key while the recorder is stopped to put the system in the SETUP mode 2 Turn the JOG dial to select the first hierarchy of the Delete PGM deleting a Program menu Alternatively you can use the SHUTTLE dial REV key or NEXT key E 7 UOM Fs HELL CLOCK 24 INT 22 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 233 24 3 Press the EXECUTE YES key The display will change an
232. mber currently set on the load destination current drive flashes The size of the program recording is also displayed Flashing ot Bit 24 IOM Fs HBUS CLOCK INT 123 45 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 5 Rotate the JOG dial to select a Program into which to load data You can select any existing Program from up to 99 If you select a Program that already contains data and execute the load operation the existing data will be overwritten by the new data If you do not wish to overwrite any data in any current Program use the JOG dial to select New PGM to execute the load operation You can do this only when the number of existing Programs is 99 or less and the hard disk has enough free space to accommodate the new data If a program that is already recorded with some sort of data is selected and loaded only the song data loaded will be valid All the data of the programs recorded on that same track up to then will be erased 6 Press the EXECUTE YES key Now you can select tracks into which to load Flashing Flashing 1 2 3 45 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 7 Select the desired track range using the JOG dial You can select 1 9 17 25 33 41 and 49 of the points that are flashing left Use the SHUTTLE dial to move the flashing cursor to the left then turn the JOG dial to select 8 16 24 32 40 48 and 56 8 Press the EXECUTE YES key SU
233. me 34 06 frame rate frame rate status reply This is the reply against 24 06 frame rate status request and is replied with the presently set frame rate 34 07 fs rate fs rate status reply This is the reply against 24 07 fs rate status request and is replied with the presently set fs sampling frequency 34 08 time base time base status reply This is the reply against 24 08 time base status request and is replied with the presently set time base in the display Model D2424 Reference Manual Maintenance Specifications FOStex Maintenance Cleaning the exterior For normal cleaning use a soft dry cloth For stubborn dirt moisten a cloth in diluted detergent wring it out firmly and wipe the dirt off Then polish with a dry cloth Never use solvents such as alcohol thinner or benzene since these will damage the printing and finish of the exterior Specifications Recorder Section Recording Medium 3 5 inch E IDE type hard disk Recording Format FDMS3 version 3 Save Load Format SCSI FDIO 1 version 2 Sampling Frequency 44 1kHz 48kHz 88 2kHz 96kHz l6bit 24bit linear 24bit at 88 2 96kHz 24bit Delta Sigma 128 times over sampling 24bit Delta Sigma 128 times over sampling 24 real tracks 32 additional tracks at 44 1kHz 16 or 24bit 48kHz 16 or 24bit 8 real tracks 48 additional tracks at 88 2kHz 24bit or 96kHz 24bit Approx 3 770 minutes 20GB
234. menu page 20 for more information on Refer to the Setting the time signature switching Time Base menu section on page 107 24 Model D2424 Reference Manual Before Starting FOSt X Recording method and REMAIN indicator Recording method The recorder uses a E IDE hard disk instead of a cassette tape You can start recording sound sources from any point on a formatted disk as long as the point is within the range of 24 hours in ABS time as described in the previous Time Base section Refer to the following diagram REC END 03m 00s OOf 10m 00s 00f 12m 00s 00f recorded area 2 min ABS 0 23h som 59s l unrecorded area recorded area 3 min unrecorded area You can record at any point within 24 hours in ABS time J The area actually used on the disk recorded area 5 min unrecorded area 25 min recordable disk area e g 30 minutes You can record at any point within 24 hours in ABS time White areas are unrecorded areas Gray areas are recorded areas For example if you record three minutes of data starting from ABS O top of the disk to ABS 03m 00s OOf on a disk that has a recordable space of thirty minutes as shown in the diagram then if you record two minutes starting at the 10 minute point in ABS time ABS 10m 00s OOf to ABS 12m OOs OOf the recording end point REC END is 12 minutes ABS 12m OOs OOf in ABS time Howe
235. might seem like the same function However they are different as shown in the diagram Remember this difference when you start using these functions Copy amp Paste Move amp Paste Using the Copy amp Paste function enables you to Move amp Paste is almost the same as Copy amp Paste copy a specific range of data from a specific track As shown in the figure it allows you to move a to the clipboard as shown below this is called specific range of data from a specific track to the Copy Clip operation on the unit then paste clipboard this is called Move Clip on the unit the data at a specific point in a specific track and paste it to a destination track The difference The number of copy source tracks and the from Copy amp Paste is that the data on the source number of destination tracks are the same That track and the clipboard will be erased when you is if you copy mono track data you can paste it paste the data to the destination That is you to a mono track If you copy adjacent odd even cannot paste the moved data repeatedly tracks e g track 1 and track 2 you can paste it Unlike Copy amp Paste this cannot be executed to adjacent odd even tracks After paste is between programs executed data on the clipboard will remain intact and as can be repeatedly pasted as well as to iid pM other programs Move source track i Move clip CLIPBOARD IN point CLIPBOARD OUT point Copy sourc
236. n on the Program Change function Refer to page 85 for more information on saving and loading song data Model D2424 Reference Manual Names and Functions FOSt X 10 Auto Return End key AUTO RTN END PREVIEW This key is used to store and recall the end point AUTO RTN END point for the Auto Return or Auto Repeat operation You can locate a stored AUTO RTN END point If you press the AUTO RTN END key while holding down the SHIFT key when the recorder is stopped you can preview the fade out part at the stored AUTO RTN END point Refer to page 54 for locating the AUTO RTN END point Refer to page 66 for copying moving data Refer to page 62 for previewing data at the AUTO RTN END point 11 Display Select key DISP SEL TIME BASE SEL This key is used to change the display mode Pressing this key repeatedly will change the display mode as follows The current position Disk space remain MTC IN or TC IN display If an optional Model 8345 TC SYNC card is installed information in the MTC IN or TC IN will differ depending on Ref TC menu setting MTC or LTC in the SETUP mode If the card is not installed 00h 00m 00s OOf OOsf will always be displayed Refer to page 25 in regards to REMAIN page 105 on the SETUP menu and the APPENDIX on details if the Model 8345 TC SYNC card is installed Pressing this key while holding down the SHIFT
237. n mono in one track units or stereo units in combinations of tracks 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Since time corresponding to length of the copy clipped sound data is required to complete the copy paste operation D2424 immediately replies with 32 46 lt edit message 02 active gt after receiving the command Successively upon completing the paste operation 32 46 lt edit message 01 completed gt is transmitted If paste cannot be executed due to improper figures of the pre registered auto punch in point insufficient disc capacity no sound data in the clipboard etc the corresponding lt edit mes sage gt will be replied 138 12 47 lt count gt lt mmc track gt erase command When this command is received D2424 will erase the data writes in O data in the section from the pre registered auto punch in point through auto punch out point in the track speci fied by mmc track Since time corresponding to length of the erase section is required to complete the erase operation D2424 will immediately reply by 32 47 edit message 02 active gt after receiving the command After the completion of erase operation 32 47 lt edit mes sage 01 completed gt will be transmitted If erase cannot be executed due to improper figures of the pre registered auto punch in point auto punch out point incor rect track section etc the corresponding lt edit message gt will be replied 12 49 clipboard play command
238. na ieena Eea eia ERa EE ENEE eia 93 koreae tineke eit aUi o pe Ce 1 E EE E A EE E AR TEE 95 Load the data saved on one removable disk eee eee eeeeeee tentent eetn tnnt 95 Load the data saved on several removable disks eee eese reete 96 Saving and Loading with IDE2 E IDE Hard disK DVD RAM essent nntnnnenns 97 Saving data of FDMS 3 Version 3 0 iet tette ioc tege tette eder toca iaioa aiae do acad pa Deae go esa eio eger pulo 97 Loading data Of FDMS 3 Version 3 0 nee rrt ttr e cose ea tar buie ra eT ves aca ska Fey ea Ca Eee aeree Hex 98 Save l oad by WAV file ertet ranana daraka eek preci inen eee Re aaae ah dia ente ute e 99 Saving of WAV filesinin 100 Oats WAV GilOS REC 102 Changing the Initial Setting SETUP mode Selects SETUP MENU eaea eaa tete teure bore anaa ea a Dee bed debes dU essa ee do deve eiui des eei dovete ae AEA 106 FOStex Model D2424 Reference Manual Safety Instruction Contents Time Signature SSUAN Ges ca es sdc5is R HG 107 setane a WGI PO MC M 109 Setting the Metronome TUlCtiOD es cese ii eris ttt ves tree ten Ib eode ESES E EEEE EELEE AEUR EEEE EEEIEE 111 Settine a Preroll Vall iii deese ertet eei aeaa eo ses e d esset obe bet ence vesdedes C eaea aa 2E dvo aeta ee ede eewe Sheesh 112 sett
239. nd the paste start point AUTO PUNCH IN point 2 Check the stored edit points using the Preview function and make adjustments if necessary 3 Specify the track to be copied and copy it in the clipboard Copy Clip 4 Switch to program for pasting using the program select function Register the copy starting point AUTO PUNCH 5 IN point in the switched program Check the registered editing point with the 6 Preview function and if necessary correct the editing point In the same way as before enter the editing mode 7 by pressing the EDIT key Copy Paste will be displayed after pressing the EDIT key 8 Next specify the track and amount to be pasted and execute paste Checking the clipboard data Data copied to the clipboard can be confirmed even after switching the program by the above procedure For example when a specific data in Program 1 is copied to the clipboard and then switched to Program 2 in which it is to be pasted as mentioned before if the PLAY button is pressed while pressing on the STOP button you can listen to data copied in Program 1 clipboard play During clipboard play P0O1 will appear in the display to indicate that copy data in Program 1 is being played back 69 Fostex Model D2424 Reference Manual Editing Tracks Erase There are two methods for erasing data Understand the differen
240. nd also phasing against slave control by external LTC and VIDEO reference signals Send receive of 24 bit 96kHz digital signals by adat input output normally not permissible will also be possible Please carefully read through this manual together with the separate Quick Reference Guide for long and satisfying operation of this equipment Fostex FOStex Model D2424 Reference Manual Safety Instruction Contents CAUTION TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK MATCH WIDE BLADE OF RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK PLUG TO WIDE SLOT FULLY INSERT DO NOT OPEN ATTENTION POUR VITER LES CHOCS LECTRIQUES INTRODUIRE CAUTION TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE DO NOT REMOVE COVER OR BACK CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQU NO USER SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE ALFOND REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of uninsulated dangerous voltage within the product s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended WA R N N G T to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance servicing instructions in the literature TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK accompanying the appliance DO NOT EXPOSE THIS APPLIANC
241. nd turning it counter clockwise decrements the value you press one of these keys the recorder returns to the previous hierarchy level of the menu and finally exits SETUP mode and displays the previous Time Base 4 Press the EXECUTE YES key The MIDI device ID number is stored and flashes Setting the Operating Clock Clock Sel menu The Setting the Operating Clock menu is used to setup the operating clock of the recorder If digital input is set to asynchronous mode of adat Async or SPDIF Async in the previous D in Digital input setting whether this recorder is to operated by its internal clock or synchronized to the word clock signal from the external digital equipment should be selected when recording in digital from external digital equipment DAT adat CD MD etc The initial setting is set to synchronize to the internal clock The setup item Video is effective if an optional Model 8345 TC SYNC card is installed For details refer to the APPENDIX Initial setting Int e Option Int Internal clock Auto Word Video Tis item will be effective if the optional Model 8345 TC SYNC card is installed in this recorder This setting is shared by all Programs in the same disk The settings cannot be saved and loaded as part of the song data The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the recorder Setting the operating clock p
242. nd you wish to keep only Take 4 apply the Multiple Undo function to Take 4 As shown on the second time axis Take 4 moves up to the most recent position Now if you optimize the disk all takes but Take 4 will be erased Completion Completion Completion Completion Completion Completion data and time dataandtime data and time data and time data and time data and time of Take 1 of Take 2 of Take 3 of Take 4 of Take 5 of Take 6 i Time axis p Undo for Take 4 Optimize Completion data and time of Take 4 e Time axis lt Keeping multiple takes gt e Apply the Multiple Undo to the desired takes and copy the Program For example if you wish to keep Take 2 and Take 4 follow the procedure described above to apply the Multiple Undo function to Take 2 then create a copy of the Program The Program copy will have only Take 2 available for the Multiple Undo function In the same way apply the Multiple Undo function to Take 4 this time then create another copy of the Program In this way you can create copies of the Programs that contain the desired takes 65 Fostex Model D2424 Reference Manual Editing Tracks Editing Tracks The recorder features speedy nonlinear nondestructive editing of independent audio tracks because it uses a 3 5 inch E IDE hard disk The following four editing functions allow Editing of Independent Audio Tracks Copy amp Paste Track Exchange You can cop
243. ng the EXIT 124 NO key or the STOP button To cancel the operation or to restore the setting obtained prior to the EXECUTE YES key press press the STOP button or the EXIT NO key Each time you press one of these keys the recorder returns to the previous hierarchy level of the menu and finally exits SETUP mode and displays the previous Time Base Model D2424 Reference Manual Changing the Initial Settings SETUP mode FOStex Setup of the reference level Ref Level menu The reference level of D2424 can be changed in the Setup of the reference level menu At the initial setting the reference level is set to 12dB but can be set to 20dB as required Because the setup content is registered in the D2424 internal System ROM it will be held even when the current drive E IDE hard disk is replaced nitial setting 12dB Options 12dB or 20dB This setting is shared by all Programs in the same disk The settings cannot be saved and loaded as part of the song data The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the recorder Setting the reference level Eu H J X A A w E 1 While the recorder is stopped press the SETUP In accordance to the reference level setting the level key to enter SETUP mo
244. ng the clipboard data Hold down the STOP button and press the PLAY button The recorder indicates whether the sound data on the clipboard is a copied data or moved data Copy Clip or Move Clip and plays the data this is called clipboard playback Monitor the playback sound through the mixer channels that correspond to the copied or moved tracks During clipboard playback the indicates of the RECORD TRACK select key for the copied or moved track will flash Fostex Model D2424 Reference Manual Editing Tracks Press the EDIT key again to get ready for the paste 8 Press the EXIT NO key or the STOP button operation The recorder exits edit mode and displays the previous Copy Paste or Move Paste flashes on the display Time Base indication 9 Turn off the RECORD TRACK select key of the copy or move source track Executing Paste 4 Press the EXECUTE YES key again Single Undo Redo Paste The display indication enables you set the number of the paste operations The number and SURE flash You can single undo or redo a Copy amp Paste At this time the flashing RECORD TRACK indicator and Move amp Paste operation becomes continuously lit Flashing Flashing To restore the data that existed prior to the paste operation press the UNDO REDO key To restore the pasted data after you undo the paste HB US operation press the UNDO REDO key again BERSGeouee 1
245. ng the preroll time setup status When this command is received this equipment replies with 34 04 mmc time 24 05 remain time request The command for inquiring the disk remaining time which is recordable When this command is received this equipment replies with 34 05 mmc time 24 06 frame rate status request The command for inquiring the frame rate setup status When this command is received this equipment replies with 34 06 frame rate 24 08 time base status The command for inquiring the setup status of the time base shown in the display When this command is received this equipment replies with 3408 time base 141 Explanation on the Status Reply 32 21 loop op mode loop operation mode status repry This is the reply against the 22 21 loop operation status re quest command loop op mode 12 gt is the only status data of D2424 and any other setting is not permissible 32 22 lt on off gt loop on off status reply This is the reply against 22 22 loop on off status request 32 28 post locate mode post locate mode status reply This is the reply against 22 28 post locate status request post locate mode 12 or 15 is the only status data of D2424 and any other setting is not permissible 32 2D edit message auto rec status reply This is the reply against the 12 2D auto rec command or the 22 2D auto rec status request 32 41 lock status lock s
246. ngs SETUP mode FOStex Changing the Initial Settings SETUP mode The SETUP mode offers the Changing the initial settings menus to configure the operating environment of the recorder a Check menu that enables you to check the number of events of each track and the Execution menus to execute certain operations such as save load and disk formatting In this chapter we will explain procedures only on lt Table 1 gt Changing the initial settings menu except setting the internal clock and Table 2 Check menu To learn how to set the internal clock refer to the Quick operation guide and on the Execution menu the Reference page written in lt Table 3 gt lt Table 1 gt Changing the initial settings menu Parameters Display Default setting Refer page Community Setting a time signature Signature Set 001bar 4 4 107 O Setting a Tempo Tempo Map Set 001bar 12120 109 O Setting the metronome function Click J Off 111 O Setting a preroll time Preroll Time 00s 112 O Setting MIDI sync output signal Midi Sync Out MTC 113 O Setting an MTC frame rate Frame Rate 25 frame 113 O Setting an MTC offset value MTC OFFSET 00h 59m 57s 00f O0sf 114 O Setting Offset mode Offset Mode ABS 115 O Setting a reference time code Ref TC Void Available with option Model 83
247. ning The appliance should be cleaned only as cart or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer recommended by the manufacturer 14 Nonuse Periods The power cord of the appliance should be unplugged from the outlet when left unused for a long period of time e 15 Object and Liquid Entry Care should be taken so that objects A ru do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through openings 16 Damage Reauiring Service The appliance should be serviced by qualified service personnel when A The power supply cord or the plug has been damaged or B Objects have fallen or liquid has been spilled into the appliance or C The appliance has been exposed to rain or D The appliance does not appear to operate normally or An appliance and cart combination should be moved with care Quick stops excessive force and uneven surfaces may cause the appliance and cart combination to overturn 7 Wallor Ceiling Mounting The appliance should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer exhibits a marked change in performance or 8 Ventilation The appliance should be situated so that its location E The appliance has been dropped or the enclosure damaged or position dose not interfere with its proper ventilation 17 Servicing The user should not attempt to service the appliance For example the appliance should not be situated on a bed beyond that described in the operating instruct
248. nnector BNC Word clock signal from the recorder is output to external digital equipment 11 MIDI Input Output Thru connector MIDI INPUT OUTPUT THRU connector DIN 5 pin MIDI INPUT Connect the MIDI OUT connector of an external MIDI device here The recorder can be controlled remotely via an external MMC MIDI Machine Control or FEX Fostex System Exclusive Message MIDI OUTPUT Connect the MIDI IN connector of the external MIDI device here The recorder will output MTC MIDI Time Code MIDI Clock signal MMC MIDI Machine Control response and FEX Fostex System Exclusive Message response MIDI THRU This connector outputs the input signal at the MIDI INPUT connector without modification When using multiple recorders via MIDI connect this terminal to the MIDI INPUT connector of the second recorder 12 WORD IN terminating switch This is the WORD IN port terminating switch 7590 Turn this ON when inputting an external word clock signal into the WORD IN connector from digital equipment 13 Digital Data Input connector DATA INPUT 1 8 9 16 17 24 connector OPTICAL These are used when loading song data in the D2424 Sound data various setup data saved in external digital equipment They are also used to input to the D2424 from external digital equipment S P DIF digital signals DAT CD MD etc or adat digital signals adat equipment digital mixer etc The connectors function as follow
249. nt mmc track 32 45 edit message 12 46 count 01 repeat count Copy paste Or 32 46 edit message 12 46 count repeat count mmc track Erase 12 47 count mmc track 32 47 edit message Clipboard play 12 49 32 49 edit message mmc track Undo 12 4A 32 4A lt edit message Redo 12 4B 32 4B edit message Move clip 12 4D count mmc track 32 4D edit message 12 4E count 01 repeat count Move paste Or 32 4E edit message 12 4E count repeat count mmc track Track Exchange 12 4F channel channel 32 4F edit message New program 13 3E 33 3E edit message Delete program 13 3F 33 3F edit message Digital in ch 13 41 channel channel sync async Digital out ch 13 42 channel channel Refer to Note Program change 13 43 program Click on off 13 44 on off Resolution on off 13 46 on off Midi Sync out 13 47 nidi sync MTC offset mode 13 48 lt MTC offset mode Vari pitch 13 49 count 3 on off vari pitch or 13 49 lt count 1 gt lt on off gt Signature set 14 01 signature map 34 00 edit message Tempo set 14 02 tempo set map 34 00 edit message Tempo map all erase14 03 34 00 edit message Preroll time set
250. nt before the Auto Punch In point and the AUTO RTN END point after the Auto Punch Out point This allows you to repeat rehearsal See the Hint 2 V 1 Press the AUTO PUNCH key The AUTO PUNCH mode will turn ON The REHEARSAL LED green and TAKE LED red of the AUTO PUNCH key will flash AUT PONS WCREHEARSAL C STAKE 2 Set the track for Auto Punch In Out to READY Press the RECORD RACK select key 3 11 19 to set track 3 to READY 3 Start playback of the recorder from a point slightly before the Auto Punch In point Only the REHEARSAL LED green will light up and start rehearsal The recorder operates as shown in the figure below during rehearsal operations AUTO PUNCH REHEARSAL f o TAKE Auto Punch Out point Rehearsal Out Auto Punch In point Rehearsal In Start point of playback End point of playback Track8 Track 7 Track6 4 Play the guitar accompanying the playback sound from tracks 1 8 for rehearsal while adjusting the recording level You will hear the guitar performance between the Auto Punch In and Out points Otherwise you will hear the recorded guitar sound 5 When you are satisfied with your rehearsal press the STOP button Hint 1 Locating a point slightly before the Auto Punch In point To locate the playback start point for rehearsal press the AUTO PUNCH IN key then press the LOCATE key The recorder displays the time p
251. nter a desired preroll time value You can set a value in one second increments Rotating the JOG dial clockwise increases the value and rotating it counter clockwise decreases the value 112 Model D2424 Reference Manual Changing the Initial Settings SETUP mode FOStex Setting MIDI sync output signal Midi Sync Out menu The Setting MIDI sync output signal menu enables you to select the type of MIDI sync signals output from the MIDI OUT connector on the rear panel of the recorder to an external MIDI device The options are MIDI clock amp Song Position Pointer or MTC MIDI time code Select an appropriate option depending on the type of signal supported by the connected MIDI device If you select MIDI clock amp Song Position Pointer first you need to set the time signatures and tempo as described previously If you select MTC you first need to set the MTC frame rate the MTC offset time and the MTC offset mode as described later Initial setting MTC e Option CLK clock amp Song Position Pointer MTC MIDI time code Off no output You can set the parameters for each Program individually The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the song data The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the recorder Setting MIDI sync signal 1 While the recorder is stopped press the SETUP key to enter SETUP mode 2 Rotate the JOG dial to select Midi Sync Out
252. nu in the SETUP mode The following procedure is based on the assumption that a multiple number of programs are in the current drive and that a tune is recorded in each program 1 Enter the SETUP mode by pressing the SETUP key while the D2424 is in the stop mode Setup example of the chain play list As an example if the chain play list is set as 2 Use the JOG dial to display the Chain Play List shown below chain play is possible in the and then press the EXECUTE YES key order of program 3 program 5 program 2 The display will change to setup of the play list If the chain list is to be ended after program 1 as shown in the example below set EE at fourth c04 in the chain list By selecting EE the chain play list setting will be c01 c03 and beyond c04 will be invalid EE can be selected with the JOG dial while the right program number is flashing RERaseavcg NMM E LICHT HBLUSG oauog 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 CLOCK SINTS 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 This display indicates the initial setting in which no chain list is setup EE means invalid The chain play number can be set in the currently blinking section left and numbers 01 through 99 can be input via the JOG dial Also the flashing section can be moved from the left 01 to the right EE by
253. o the clipboard out point as data for move paste operation With completion copying the data into the clipboard D2424 will immediately reply with 32 4D edit message 01 completed gt If copy cannot be ex ecuted by the reason of pre registered improper clipboard in clipboard out point figures or incorrect track section etc the corresponding edit message will be replied 12 4E countz01 repeat count gt move paste command 12 4E lt count gt lt repeat count gt lt mmc track move paste com mand When this command is received D2424 will paste the sound data which have been move clipped in the clipboard for the number of times specified by repeat count on the same track from the pre registered auto punch in point as the starting point At the same time the move clipped original sound data will be erased data O is written in However when sound Model D2424 Reference Manual MIDI Implementation Chart MMC List FOSt X data length in the clipboard is less than 10ms specifying the repeat count gt will be limited to 01 Also by specifying the mmc track paste operation can be executed on other tracks in mono one track unit or stereo units tracks 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Since time corresponding to length of the move clipped sound data is required to complete the move paste operation D2424 will immediately reply with 32 4E edit message 02 ac tive gt after receiving the command Follow
254. ode and BAR BEAT CLK bar beat clock ABS indicates an absolute time on the disk MTC indicates a relative time that is obtained by adding a certain value MTC offset value to the ABS value BAR BEAT CLK indicates the position in a song created in the internal Tempo Map according to MIDI clock and Song Position Pointer The following diagrams depict the relationship among these three types of the Time Base ABS 0 DISK END 00 m 00 s 00 f 00 m 08 s 00 f REC END 23 h 59 m 59 s ABS 002 bar 1 4 00 clk vitm 4 00 clk BAR BEAT CLK BAR 4 001bar 0404 TEMPO 001bar 1 4 60 01 h 00 m 00 s 00 f 01 h 00 m 08 s 00 f s h 59 m 59 s MTC MTC OFFSET 01h 00m 00s 00f MTC OFFSET MODE ABS This shall be assumed to be the MTC OFFSET time set for the ABS 00m 00s and 00f positions fe h 59 m 52 s 00 f 01 h 00 m 00 s 00 f Vas h 59 m 51 s MTC MTC OFFSET 01h 00m 00s 00f MTC OFFSET MODE Bar J This shall be assumed to be the MTC OFFSET time set for the 00 bar 1 Recorded area Non recorded area beat and 00 clk positions Note As shown in the figure the ABS 0 position top of the disk is 2 bar 1 beat 00 clk You can switch between these three types Time Base BAR BEAT CLK You can change of Time Base to suit your purpose Refer this position in the ranged 9 bar to 2 bar to the explanation in Display Section on in the Setting the time signature
255. ode ON Both REHEARSAL LED and TALE LED are blinking Auto Punch TAKE mode Only the TAKE LED red is lit Auto Punch REHEARSAL mode Only the REHEARSAL LED green is lit Rehearsal mode entered by means of MMC or foot switch Only the REHEARSAL LED green is blinking Note If a correct value is not stored pressing the AUTO PUNCH key will not enable the function and the message Void Out Point will appear If a correct value is not stored pressing the AUTO PUNCH key will not turn on the function and the Model D2424 Reference Manual Names and Functions FOStex message Void Out Point will alert you In this case set a correct value for the Auto Punch In Out point Also the function is not turned on when you press the AUTO PUNCH key if the disk does not have enough recording space The display will indicate expe estf Over Punch In Out mode Auto Punch In Out AUT PUNCH EREHEARSAL CI SOC TAKE Rehearsal Punch In Out using a foot switch or MMC Auto Punch mode ODD AUT nee REHEARSAL O TAKE Rehearsal Take Rehearsal Take AUTO AUTO AUTO PUNCH REHEARSAL a REHEARSAL PUNCH REHEARSAL pyncH REHEARSAL O TAKE I I e TAKE O TAKE f TAKE ab iai O90 off light up 79 blink l 7 operation Refer to page 39 for details about Punch In Out 31 Shift key SHIFT Press a key or button while hol
256. of the stop function at the mark point cere eer eE ESENES ESEE IE E Ye vvv 124 Setup of the reference level iiic ei ee ves Eb ae ey eyed Er EN eae V EE a ER e de voe a dono 125 Setup input output Balance Unbalance ccccsssccsssscessecessecessecesseecesseecsseecesseecesaeeessneceseeecesaeecsseeeeeseeees 126 Dive Ori alte MOP AOI sseccces exccde face tecectataciessececsecscess ansussucacesbete caseactsacauces sdciustesttecuusteceessecexesucucctoettesusstcansone 127 Drive EID 129 Setup of tbe display contrast level 2 n tete iisi aont era eran tort te aaa RD RP ERR aaea Eae E ae sedeo Pao iia 130 MIDI Implementation GMA Mt me e 131 MMC Command Lit P 132 Inquiry MessagelList eo oae tte eode one Uster oto bon n eere inv tee ee Duet iu 132 Fostex MIDI System Exclusive Message sssssssssssssseeseseeee eene nennen enne tnis 133 Status EOS weisis seid sesscstevesesecssvectesesvedss iy scebevca seesasucstesaceedasessievsneecdseseiesvvescissvesesteveusa cdaavvetestssessexiaseusds 134 iricMbudcpe E 136 Explanation on the Command Mod e Set ccsscssssecsssceesseccsseecesecesececessecesseeesseecsseecesaeecsteseseeeessees 138 The Status Request Commdrd tree rre ri o T We TRU ve EE or tree PL REPE e ERU 140 Explanation on the Status Reply 2 iene ste voire eee EE eoo EF HEN F
257. oint is passed in the number of repeats PLAY or RECORD mode 7 Press the EXECUTE YES key ENED OWE WAS SOR HOH OM Copy Paste or Move Paste flashes and the duration If program select was executed of the pasted data appears as a negative number on the When multiple undo is executed display This number will count down as the paste operation proceeds When the paste operation is complete the flashing Copy Paste or Move Paste lights up continuously and COMPLETED is displayed lt Note gt If you try to execute the paste operation by pressing the EXECUTE YES key when the disk has insufficient free space Over appears on the display and edit mode is cancelled In this case you need to delete unnecessary data or programs e Refer to the following section Erase Deleting a Program or Duplicating a Program e Refer to page 70 for more information on erasing e Refer to page 37 for more information on deleting a program e Refer to page 36 for more information on duplicating a program 68 Model D2424 Reference Manual Editing Tracks FOSt X Copy amp Paste between programs Copy amp Paste between programs can be performed using the procedures below in the same manner as in the previous Copy amp Paste in the same program Store the copy or move start point CLIPBOARD 1 IN point end point CLIPBOARD OUT point a
258. om this recorder but also to read data by this recorder because data in WAV file is saved to the backup disk the computer can read write it directly and therefore playback editing the WAV file using various software is possible Additionally WAV files edited with a computer can be read by this recorder Notes when using a WAV file gt THE BACKUP DISK Save load by WAV file is possible only to disks formatted in DOS FAT 16 This recorder will execute save load by WAV file only when this DOS disk is acknowledged by DOS FAT 16 Disks DOS formatted in FAT 32 will not be acknowledged DOS formatting using the SETUP mode Disk Format menu is not possible Consequently backup disks to be used for WAV file must be formatted in FAT 16 before being used If a disk of more than 2GB is formatted in FAT 16 the disk will be partitioned to a maximum 2GB capacity In this case this recorder will acknowledge the first partition only the other partitions will not be acknowledged As a result the maximum capacity for the backup disk used by this recorder will always be 2GB for one disk drive At save load by WAV file it is recommended to use a newly formatted disk to prevent loss of data due to overwriting DIRECTORY OF THE BACKUP DISK The saved WAV file will be recorded in the root directory first level of the backup disk WAV files that can be loaded must be placed in the root directory of the backup disk WAV files that have been moved f
259. on as possible 23 Action to take Correctly set the E IDE hard disk again No disk error display This is displayed when the removable disk is incorrectly set in the SCSI device EL TL 1 2 3 45 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Action to take Reset the removable disk Recording Disable Recording is disabled 1 2345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Action to take Change the Off recording Rec Protect setting in Setup mode Fostex Model D2424 Reference Manual Before Starting Before Starting This chapter describes some basic items that you need to know before you start operating the recorder All users including those who are familiar with using tape based multitrackers and those who are new to multitrackers should read this chapter thoroughly to understand the functions of the recorder 1 Time Base 2 Recording method and REMAIN indicator 3 Managing songs by Program Change function 4 Real tracks and Additional tracks 5 Input monitoring and playback monitoring 6 Audio file and Event Time Base The word Time Base appears frequently in this manual The concept of Time Base is similar to a tape counter on a conventional tape based multitracker in that it indicates the precise position of the recorder transport section the current position The recorder offers three types of Time Base ABS Absolute type MTC MIDI time c
260. on off setup status When this command is received this equipment replies with 33 46 lt on off gt Model D2424 Reference Manual MIDI Implementation Chart MMC List FOStex 23 47 midi sync out status request The command for inquiring on status of the midi sync out setup condition When this command is received this equip ment replies with 33 47 midi sync 23 48 MTC offset mode status request The command for inquiring the MTC offset mode setup status When this command is received this equipment replies with 33 48 MTC offset mode 23 49 vari pitch status request The command for inquiring status of vari pitch on off and vari pitch data When this command is received this equipment replies with 33 49 lt count 3 gt on off vari data 24 01 event number signature map request The command for inquiring the meter setup Order number counting from the leading tune must be specified in the event number The first event is expressed as event number 00 When this command is received this equipment replies with 34 O1 lt signature map 24 02 event number Tempo set map request The command for inquiring tempo data Order number from the leading tune must be specified in the event number The first event is expressed as event number 00 When this command is received this equipment replies with 34 02 tempo set map 24 04 preroll time status request The command for inquiri
261. onal DVD RAM drive is possible by the same procedure 1 Enter the SETUP mode by pressing the SETUP key 2 Select Load PGM flashes with the JOG dial and press the EXECUTE YES key The currently set content will be displayed flashing Flashing oL rau 24 Q M Fs IL ee CLOCK INT 1 2345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 3 Select the flashing SCSI 6 or IDE2 with the JOG dial and press the EXECUTE YES key After display of Drive name and DOS format the WAV file name and its capacity is displayed and SURE will flash at the same time No SCSI Disk will be displayed if no disk is loaded Flashing 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 102 4 Select the WAV file to be loaded with the JOG dial If a multiple number of WAV files with different file names Beginning 6 letters have been saved the WAV file names beginning 6 letters and capacity will be sequentially displayed If Eject is selected the backup disc can be removed Note File names other than WAV cannot be acknowledged nor loaded by this recorder WAV files with the beginning 6 letters of the file name will be individually acknowledged and can be selected 5 Select WAV file then press the EXECUTE YES key The display will change to selecting the track to be loaded All Trk will flashes If the JOG dial is rotated at this stage 01
262. oot switch for manual punch in out page 41 You can change this to PLAY STOP of the recorder if you so wish nitial setting Punch IO e Option Punch IO Punch in out function or PLY STP Play stop function This setting is shared by all Programs in the same disk The settings cannot be saved and loaded as part of the song data The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the recorder 125 Fostex Model D2424 Reference Manual Changing the Initial Setting SETUP mode Setting the foot switch function 1 While the recorder is stopped press the SETUP key to enter SETUP mode 2 Turn the JOG dial to select Foot SW flashes then press the EXECUTE YES key A flashing will extinguish by pressing the EXECUTE YES key and the foot switch function information that was lit will being flashing Initial setting it will show Punch IO 12 34 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Flashing E E 2 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 3 Select the desired function by rotating the JOG dial 4 After selecting the function press the EXECUTE YES key again The selected foot switch function will be registered and the Step 2 will return to flashing 5 Exit from the SETUP mode by pressing the EXIT NO key or STOP button To cancel the operation or to restore the setting obtained prior to the
263. osition stored in the AUTO PUNCH IN key and locates the point and stops Press the REWIND button to go backward If you have set the preroll time as described on page 112 you can locate a point that precedes the Auto Punch In point by the specified preroll value Auto Punch In point Auto Punch Out point Stop here Locate Locate gt The recorder stops at a point that precedes the Auto Punch In point by the specified preroll time 0 10 seconds lt Hint 2 gt Quick and easy operation for repeated rehearsal Using the Auto Return function and the Auto Play function enables you to rehearse repeatedly As shown below set the AUTO RTN START and END points for Auto Return and Auto Play In this way you can repeat rehearsal easily while checking the recording level and concentrating on your performance Refer to page 50 for more information on setting the AUTO RTN START END points Auto Punch In point Auto Punch Out point Auto Return Start point Auto Return End point Rehearsal area Track 5 Track 4 Track 3 Track 2 Track 1 This part is changed All tracks are in playback monitoring mode All tracks are in playback monitoring mode Only track 3 in input monitoring The sound is not recorded to this time The RECORD button lamp flashes The recorder punches out automatically at the Punch Out point The recorder punches in autom
264. ou finish recording stop the recorder and the connected digital equipment Fostex Model D2424 Reference Manual Recording Digital Data Clock Sel 7 D in setting setting Int Auto Word Video When receiving word clock from When receiving word clock from clock received Regardless of receiving or not re WORD IN the recorder automati WORD IN the recorder synchro from WORD IN ceiving word clock from WORD IN cally synchronizes to the incom nizes to the incoming clock while the recorder is referenced to the ing clock while the DIGITAL and the DIGITAL and EXT indicators SPDIF Async internal clock When the recorder EXT indicators light in the display light in the display receives correct digital signals the no clock DIGITAL indicator lights in the When no word clock is received When no word clock is received the received from display the recorder is referenced to the EXT indicator flashes showing that internal clock while the EXT in the unit cannot be locked gt WORD IN dicator flashes Available only when installing the op clock received Regardless of receiving or not receiving word clock from WORD IN the recorder synchronizes tothe tional Model 8345 from WORD IN external S P DIF digital signal When the recorder receives correct digital signals the DIGITAL and TC SYNC card If SPDIF Sync no clock EXT indicators light in the display When
265. p of multiple audio file as shown in the diagram below More precisely one audio file will be divided into multiple audio files if perform many editing operations such as copy amp paste move amp paste etc on this audio file Multiple audio files created in this way are regarded as events If you do not edit the data at all the audio file remains in one piece and is regarded as one event In this example one recorded area consists of six consecutive audio files This means that this part consists of six events 29 Fostex Model D2424 Reference Manual Before Starting Recorded Area Audio File 1 Audio File 2 Audio File 3 Audio File 4 Audio File 5 Audio File 6 n 1 n 2 n 3 n 4 n 5 n 6 Event Number This is because when you perform a copy amp paste move amp paste or Auto Punch In Out the event is split at the edit point Also if a continuous long recording is made the recorded data might scatter to different locations on the hard disk thus dividing the data unto multiple events CLIPBOARD IN point CLIPBOARD OUT point 0 File Audio File 1 Audio File 2 Audio File 3 Audio File 4 Audio File 5 Audio File 6 OFile Event Number n 1 n 2 n 3 n 4 n 5 n 6 Countermeasures against accumulating too many events due to a long recording plus many editing operations One solution is to save and re load the data to and from a DAT adat or SCSI device If the song is too long you may not be able to save t
266. play shows the ABS Time Base indication of the Program 7 Press the EXIT NO key or STOP button Important e When you create a new Program by selecting the New PGM menu a new Program is created with an increment number That is if only one Program exists and when you create a new Program it will be named Program 2 If Programs 1 5 already exist a new Program number will be 6 e f there is insufficient recording space on the disk you cannot create the new Program Each time you create a new Program the recordable area on the disk will decrease Duplicating a Program Any program content Recording data various setup items can be duplicated but with a separate program number Notes Duplicating a program is possible only when the Multiple Undo function is set to ON when formatting the current drive In a current drive with this setting at OFF the PGM Duplicate message will not display when pressing the EDIT key mentioned below The program which can be duplicated must be the currently active program Therefore the program you wish to duplicate must be activated prior to executing the duplicating mode 1 With this recorder in the stop mode press the EDIT key to display PGM Duplicate flashes Pane e cmp a a UOM rs H CI A pe E H CLOCK H INT 0 Bede E 3 4 5 6 7 B 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 2 Press the EXECUTE YES key A
267. process thus forcing you to use an unformatted disk or a used disk that already has other data saved on it Observe the respective procedures described when inserting the disk according to the Insert Disk 2 or Insert Disk 3 message that prompts you to Insert another disk as shown in the instructions on the left When inserting an unformatted disk The recorder automatically recognizes an Unformatted disk and will indicate Unformat then automatically go to the Disk Format menu in the SETUP mode to format the backup disk Follow the formatting procedures to actually format the backup disk The save process automatically resumes when the disk is successfully formatted When inserting a disk that is saved or loaded with other data The following display may appear as an example when inserting such type of disk This prompt is asking you whether you want to erase the existing data saved on the disk that was inserted and indicates that you have entered the Delete PGM menu in the SETUP mode If it is okay to erase that disk press the EXECUTE YES key The Delete ALL PGM message will appear Press the EXECUTE YES key to delete all programs Save is automatically resumed after the programs are deleted If it is not okay to erase the disk turn the JOG dial to select Eject when the above indication appears to eject the disk Press the EXECUTE YES key after Eject is selected When the dis
268. rack 5 Track 4 Track 3 This part is changed Track 2 Track 1 All tracks are in Only track 3 in input All tracks are in playback monitoring monitoring playback monitoring mode The sound is not recorded to mode this time The RECORD button lamp flashes The recorder punches in automatically at the Punch In point The recorder punches out automatically at the Punch Out point e Track 3 indication on the display will only light up between the AUTO PUNCH IN OUT point and will flash in any other case e When the Auto Punch Out point is passed the recorder cancels Auto Punch mode automatically and nothing appears in the A PUNCH display area Caution after Punch Out At Take of punch out the punch in recording track will not immediately enter the repro monitor mode from the input monitor mode enter the repro monitor mode about two seconds after mute playback This is a functional feature of recorder and not a malfunction 5 When you finish recording press the STOP button 6 Play track 3 to check the result of the Auto Punch In Out operation If you fail with AUTO PUNCH IN OUT and are not satisfied repeat the process by performing the AUTO PUNCH IN OUT undo operations described in the next section Single Undo Redo You can single undo or redo Auto Punch In Out recording Press the UNDO REDO key after recording is complete to restore the conditions that existed prior
269. rding level easily especially since Manual 3 Press the PLAY button to play back from a point Punch In Out involves operating the foot switch slightly before the Punch In point operation as well as the recorder See Hint 2 in the Rehearsing Auto Punch In Out recording for more information 42 Model D2424 Reference Manual Punch In Out FOStex Manual Punch In Out take aniis mn You can use the PLAY button and the RECORD You can proceed to record if you are satisfied button instead of using the foot switch with the recording level foot switch timing and Follow the steps below rehearsal This method also does not allow you to record Note You cannot record a second take during the Manual Punch In Out operation without stopping the recorder That is the recorder will continue playing after you finish recording a take but you cannot record another take by pressing the foot switch 1 Confirm that Rehearsal mode is cancelled and start playing the recorder from a point slightly before the desired Punch In point 2 Play the guitar accompanying the playback of tracks 1 to 8 3 Press the foot switch at the desired Punch In point Press the foot switch again at the desired Punch Out point Auto Punch In point Take In Auto Punch Out point Take Out Start point of playback End point of playback Track8 Track 7 Track6 Track 5 Track4 Track3 Track2 Track 1
270. rding time after formatting 44 1kHz 48kHz 88 2kHz 96kHz Capacity 16 bits 24 bits 16 bits 24 bits 24 bits 24 bits 10 0GB Approx 1888 min Approx 1258 min Approx 1735 min Approx 1156 min Approx 628 min Approx 577 min Formatting a brand new hard disk Current drive nU EIE oC ee o M M M u MH This section describes how to format an E IDE hard disk used for the current drive assuming that a hard disk has already been installed in the recorder Refer to next page on newly formatting the E IDE hard disk for backup or the optional DVD RAM disk 1 Turn on the power to the recorder The recorder displays the ROM version time and date then displays Initializing Current IDE Drv model name of the hard disk in this order then Unformat momentarily Finally the unit displays the Disk Format menu in Setup mode showing the following screen Flashing 3 khz CLOCK 2 pate 30 E E 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 2 Press the EXECUTE YES key The model name of the current E IDE hard disk and flash on the screen Flashing kite E 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1112 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 3 Press the EXECUTE YES key again The recorder displays the screen that enables you to s
271. recorder starts the backup format operation During the format operation REMAIN lights up on the screen and the recorder indicates the size of the unformatted area on the disk which counts down as the format operation proceeds Wait until formatting is complete When the format operation is complete COMPLETED lights up and the disk stops spinning 6 Press the EXIT NO key or the STOP button to exit Setup mode The recorder displays the time base value of the current drive that was shown before the unit entered Setup mode To eject the disk from the backup drive press the EJECT button on the drive Optimizing the disk If you are using a disk that was formatted with the Multiple Undo function turned on free disk space becomes smaller quickly because the disk always keeps the Multiple Undo files Optimizing such a disk using the Disk Optimize menu in Setup mode will increase free block space Note After you record multiple takes if you optimize the disk with the Multiple Undo function turned on you will be able to undo only the most recent take Therefore if you wish to keep some takes perform the Multiple Undo function or use the Program duplicate function to restore the take then optimize the disk For more information see Multiple Undo Function on page 64 1 While the disk is not being accessed press the 3 Press and hold down the RECORD button and SETUP key to put the unit into Setup mo
272. ress Flashing LO Ad 6 Press the EXIT NO key or STOP button The COMPLETED go off 1 234567 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Rotating the JOG dial will toggle between B and Eject If you wish to cancel the load operation and remove the disk select Eject and press the EXECUTE YES key 3 Press the EXECUTE YES key A prompt inquiring whether to set a new program on the current drive which is the load destination will appear New PGM appears and SURE flashes Flashing Flashing 12345 6 7 8 9 10 1112 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 224 Turning the JOG dial in this state makes it possible to select a program on the current drive The size of the program appears when the program is selected If you select a program that is already recorded with data and load is executed for the load destination the existing data is deleted while loading takes place If you do not want to overwrite the existing data select New PGM mentioned above prior to loading 4 Press the EXECUTE YES key after selecting the program Loading is started and the display will show B gt gt P MB This indicates that the backup data B on the SCSI hard disk is being loaded on the current drive program P The MB load size is counted down as loading proceeds When Disk 1 loading is completed an Insert Disk 2 message appears and Disk 1 is automatically
273. rmation on storing the desired points in the AUTO RTN START key and the AUTO RTN END key Hint You can make repeated Auto Punch In Out rehearsal much easier and quicker by using the Auto Repeat function Set the AUTO RTN START point prior to the AUTO PUNCH IN point and set the AUTO RTN END point after the AUTO PUNCH OUT point The recorder will repeat the operation automatically so you can concentrate on your rehearsal Cancel Auto Repeat mode before you record a take The recorder will play this range repeatedly for rehearsal which makes it easy for you to check the recording level and practice your performance AUTO PUNCH IN point AUTO RTN START point Rehearsal range AUTO PUNCH OUT point gt AUTO RTN END point M PLAYBACK PLAYBACK START p LOCATE 56 Model D2424 Reference Manual Chain Play function FOSTEX Chain Play function Chain play functions to playback in any order the tunes recorded on a multiple number of programs There are three modes of chain play and each operates as shown below Before executing these modes AUTO RTN START point and AUTO RTN END point must be set for each program For details please read the explanations starting from the next page Pause mode dla P ciis In the pause mode as shown in the example on the left upon reaching the END point at playback of program 02 the recorder automatic
274. rom the root directory to another location such as a different folder cannot be acknowledged by this recorder and could cause a malfunction FILE NAME OF THE WAV FILE WAV files saved by this recorder will be recorded under the file name of WAV WAV files which can be loaded by this recorder must have a file name of 4 5 WAV The first 6 letters will be the title displayed by Title Edit in the SETUP mode These 6 letters can be changed at save of the WAV file and also edited by the computer The latter 2 letters represent each track number 1 24 at save load of the WAV file The last WAV is the extension to indicate that this file is a WAV file File names other than those described here will not be acknowledged by this recorder For details refer to each procedure Using these specifications WAV files can be loaded in any single track or tracks exchanged and loaded in the WAV file Refer to Loading of WAV files in later pages 99 FOStex Model D2424 Reference Manual Saving and Loading Song Data Saving of WAV files A WAV file is saved by the following procedure Before proceeding to save make sure a DOS formatted disk in FAT 16 is set in the SCSI ID6 equipment The following explains the procedures for using a backup disk after it had been formatted The E IDE hard disk or optional DVD RAM drive for backup can be used by the same procedures at saving in the DOS forma
275. rresponding LED lights up When this function is disabled the LED turns off The range of pitch variation for playback and recording is 6 0 in 0 1 steps Press the SHIFT key and then the VARI PITCH key to display the current pitch data To change the pitch data use the JOG dial to change the value while the pitch data is displayed You can also change the playback speed when the data is being played back with the Vari pitch function ON To quit the pitch data display press the EXIT NO key or the STOP button Notes Even if the pitch data is 0 096 no speed change pressing the VARI PITCH key will still turn on the VARI PITCH function The speed is not changed but the Vari Pitch is turned on The Vari Pitch function will automatically turn off under the following conditions 1 You have turned off and on the power to this recorder The pitch data will be reset to 0 0 2 You have pressed the EXECUTE YES key while holding down the SHIFT key to turn the SLAVE mode on the setting pitch data remains 3 You set Digital In of the SETUP mode to a SYNC mode SPDIF Sync or adat Sync and the recorder is locking to the external clock from DIGITAL IN or WORD IN In consequence DIGITAL and EXT indicators light in the display 4 You have installed the optional Model 8345 TC SYNC card in this recorder and set the LTC OUT to Gen Refer to Quick Operation Guide for more informa
276. rt of process for which the optional Model 8345 TC SYNC card is necessary and is not installed 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Invalid In Out indication The In or Out point is not appropriate for the operation Action to take Input correct data QL prr 2a yan FS use CLOCK i INT i 12 3 45 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 QL Bir Aj 3 WOM Fs S TO ie 18 CLOCK 24 INT gt z sm 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 28 24 Overtime indication Available disk space is insufficient for the length of time the number of measures indicated on the display 1 2 3 45 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Action to take During the copy amp paste and move amp paste operation try to shorten the length of the copied data by the indicated amount Alternatively use the ERASE function to move the ABS END point backward to obtain enough disk space for editing Note Optimizing the disk is necessary in the current drive in which multiple undo is ON Unassigned track indication Select any track eocoQ 12 18 24 30 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Action to take Use the RECORD TRACK select key to ready any track Model D2424 Reference Manual Names and Functions FOSt X Event overflow indication The editing points have overflowed 12345
277. s When loading song data DATA INPUT 1 8 only can be used At input of S P DIF digital signals DATA INPUT 1 8 Inputs to tracks 1 2 DATA INPUT 9 16 Will not function DATA INPUT 17 24 Will not function At input of adat digital signals DATA INPUT 1 8 Inputs to tracks 1 8 DATA INPUT 9 16 Inputs to tracks 9 16 DATA INPU T 17 24 Inputs to tracks 17 24 14 Digital Data Output connector DATA OUTPUT 1 8 9 16 17 24 connector OPTICAL These are used when saving song data Sound data various setup data in external digital equipment from D2424 These are also used at output of S P DIF digital signals or adat digital signals to external digital equipment from D2424 In compliance to the use the connectors will function as follows At save of song data DATA OUTPUT 1 8 only can be used At output of S P DIF digital signals DATA OUTPUT 1 8 Outputs tracks 1 2 DATA OUTPUT 9 16 Outputs tracks 3 4 DATA OUTPUT 17 24 Outputs tracks 5 6 At output of adat digital signals DATA OUTPUT 1 8 Outputs tracks 1 8 DATA OUTPUT 9 16 Outputs tracks 9 16 DATA OUTPUT 17 24 Outputs tracks 17 24 Refer to page 85 for information about LOAD function Refer to page 44 for information Digital Recording Display section The recorder display integrates the level meter of a high visibility FL tube with a 16 digits and 35 dot messag
278. s an example the following is displayed and SURE will flash This means that program 01 will be duplicated for program 05 the new program 05 Refer see Note below B8teageooc wee Flashing T 3 H 3 12 18 4 2 E 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 26 Note The program to be duplicated will be assigned with a program number following that of the program presently existing in the disk If Duplicate PO1 05 is displayed as in the previous example this indicates that four programs presently exist in the disk and that the new program will be number 05 If the duplicated program is to be checked or you wish to switch to this program refer to the next item Selecting a program 3 Press the EXECUTE YES key again The display will change to head of the duplicated original program P01 in this example and COMPLETED will light 4 Press the EXIT NO key or STOP button COMPLETED will be extinguished By following these procedures the same content in program 01 is duplicated in program 05 Model D2424 Reference Manual Handling Programs FOStex Using a Program Change function If multiple Programs exist on the disk you need to select a Program to record play or edit This section describes how to select a Program Note You cannot use the Program Change function when the recorder is in SETUP mode 1 When the recorder i
279. s can be saved and loaded as part of the song data The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the recorder Setting an MTC offset 1 While the recorder is stopped press the SETUP key to enter SETUP mode 2 Turn the JOG dial to select MTC Offset flashes then press the EXECUTE YES key The current offset value appears on the display Pressing the EXECUTE YES key turns off the flashing character and the value in secondsflashes You can enter a value at the flashing digit The number 57 of the initial setting 57s flashes as shown below or 3 H 8 1 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 114 Model D2424 Reference Manual Changing the Initial Settings SETUP mode FOStex 3 Use the SHUTTLE dial to move the flashing cursor To cancel the operation or to restore the setting and turn the JOG dial to enter the desired offset obtained prior to the EXECUTE YES key press press value the STOP button or the EXIT NO key Each time you For example if you rotate the JOG dial on the seconds press one of these keys the recorder r eturns to the digit up 59 turning the dial further will increase the previous hierarchy level of the menu and finally exits number on the digit of minute by one SETUP mode and displays the previous Time Base 4 Press the EXECUTE YES key Note The selected offset value is stored and the display returns
280. s eve ova Coe variae Qa ee eoe dee ibunt 78 Setupot THE recordet use i reris eere de o Ober E eddie haa Dee i e Ed 78 Confirming MTC sync MIMG niece ires op separe epe E E aa ae aa aE e a E N Ea E EEE rE 19 Exec ting rsen eO D 79 Multitrack systemby the slave mode Ieri ene weed aces tines een pae RUE Lad Eo eu dE RR aad 80 Equipment interconnecblOfis o oerisoes dusasus anioe een iet torret ratae era ire eee eroe dee rere oe ir rere reseau 80 Setup of the recorder Z1 Masters eerte rente eer eoe teea o ee E beber e eei R 80 Setup of the recorder Z2 and 43 Slave iie ee erre etnies atate tena tta rase taa eee RE rn dag 81 CHECK Chase LOCK M 82 selecting a TeCOLG WACK senie areara e aa aAa tuere ses tee ae IN es aeea e a adaa nasa raie TEREE 82 Executing Of TeCOPGin gO ivisccccsii 82 External MIDI equipment sync system by the slave MOE ecececeseeeeeesseeeseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaseeseeaeeeseeseseesateeseseesaseeeateee 83 Connection to external CquipMeNt c00scesssecssessscssrssessovscescsscssenssessssovsssesorsccenssssssesscssvesorsseseosscesae 83 Setup Of external equiptinent oes cett re eret eret trei everti vn E vat e CE TESTNE 83 Setup of the TeCOFdet see erosion Fee veste vH ee Y Ve EE YE VE Yvette er m foire e ive ope eset ead 83 Confirming chase Iock eene intente neonato epe trarre etate Eve AEREA yere pee Cena EYE ees deae ENERE ENEE 84 E
281. s shorter than when using Standard Format 8 real tracks Track architecture 24 real tracks 32 additional tracks 48 additional tracks 8 track simultaneous analog recording 8 track simultaneous analog 8 track simultaneous analog 6 tracks and digital 2 tracks recording S P DIF recording 8 track simultaneous analog 6 Recording 16 track simultaneous analog 8 tracks and digital 8 tracks tracks and digital 2 tracks S adat recording P DIF recording 24 track simultaneous adat digital recording Saving and loading data via adat or S P DIF digital signal Saving and loading data via Saving and loading data via SCSI FDMS 3 or WAVE SCSI FDMS 3 or WAVE Save Load Saving and loading data via E IDE hard disk or optional Saving and loading data via E Model 9046 DVD RAM drive FDMS 3 or WAVE IDE hard disk or optional Model 9046 DVD RAM drive FDMS 3 or WAVE 3l Fostex Model D2424 Reference Manual Formatting and Optimizing Disks Available recording time after formatting A greater sampling frequency will reduce the available recording time space after formatting Under the same sampling frequency setting the greater quantization bit number reduces the available recording time The following table shows the approximate available recording time under each sampling frequency quantization Depending on your medium the available recording time may differ slightly It will be a good idea to check the available reco
282. s stopped press the PGM Rotating the JOG dial counter clockwise decreases the key number and rotating it clockwise increases the number Select POM appears on the display briefly then If you turn the JOG dial clockwise all the way New changes to flashing 01 and SURE eee is ihe Program will be selected Select New Program to f w of PGM 01 8 is create a new Program as mentioned in the previous section Creating a new Program 3 Press the EXECUTE YES key The ABS Time Base indication for the selected Program appears Flashing In this way you can be sure to select a Program before you start working 2 2 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 2 Turn the JOG dial to select the desired Program number flashing Deleting a Program This section explains how to delete an unnecessary Program Deleting an unnecessary Program will expand the recordable area making your work flow more smoothly since recording or editing requires sufficient recordable area free space on the disk Use the Delete PGM menu in SETUP mode to delete a Program lt Notes on deleting a Program gt e You can delete only the currently selected Program Refer to the previous section Using a Program Change function for information on how to select the desired Program before you proceed to delete the Program P04 P05 e If only one Progra
283. sed Using this function allows you to automatically store a beat resolution value of the CLIPBOARD IN OUT points and other points in real time Press the STORE key then the corresponding memory key while playing the recorder Therefore it is very convenient when you perform the Copy amp Paste or Move amp Paste operation in beat resolution signature setting of 4 4 For example assume that you have stored the value for O01bar 1 346 clk as the CLIPBOARD IN point and the value for 002bar 4 51 clk as the CLIPBOARD OUT point These values will be used as they are if BAR BEAT resolution mode is turned off However the mode is turned on the following values will be stored instead The following example has a time 001bar 1 7 46 clk gt OO1bar 1 J 00 clk A clk value of 46 will be rounded off 002bar 4 J 51 clk gt OO3bar 1 J 00 clk A clk value of 51 will be rounded up nitial setting Off Options On or Off This setting is shared by all Programs in the same disk The settings cannot be saved and loaded as part of the song data The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the recorder 119 Fostex Model D2424 Reference Manual Changing the Initial Setting SETUP mode Setting BAR BEAT resolution mode 1 While the recorder is stopped press the SETUP 3 Use the JOG dial to turn the mode On or Off key to enter SETUP mode 2 Turn the JOG dial to sel
284. sh to store is reached press the STORE key The time value or bar beat clock value of the point is captured The recorder enters data edit mode Note The following menu number from 00 99 appears when pressing the STORE key This menu is used to store data in the LOCATE key described later Ignore this menu and go to the next step when storing data in the memory key Flashing LOCATE s BIENES uu LIC 1 2 3 45 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 2223 24 Editing and storing data 4 1 3 Press the desired memory key The STORE LED turns off The captured time value or bar beat clock value is stored in the memory key After the data is stored the recorder displays the previous Time Base and continues playback 4 Press the STOP button Please remember this e If you set BAR BEAT Resolution mode in SETUP mode to ON the recorder will round off the CLK value of the captured bar beat clock value That is the locate point will be at the beginning of the beat 00 Refer to page 119 for more information e When pressing the STORE key in step 2 if the STORE key is pressed while holding down the SHIFT key data to be registered will be held and be confirmed To register data after confirmation press the STORE key again and press the desired memory key You can recall data stored in the memory key edit it and store it again 1 4 3 FOStex Mo
285. status Drive Info 127 lt Table 3 gt Execution menu Execution item Display Refer page Community Editing a program title Title Edit PGM 37 Deleting a program Delete PGM 36 Loading song data Load PGM 84 Saving song data Save PGM 84 Optimizing a Disk Disk Optimize 30 3 Formatting a Disk Disk Format 30 105 Fostex Model D2424 Reference Manual Changing the Initial Settings SETUP mode Selecting SETUP mode Follow the steps below to select the desired SETUP menu in SETUP mode 1 While the recorder is stopped press the SETUP key on the control panel Pressing the SETUP key causes the recorder to enter SETUP mode The recorder displays the first hierarchy level of the SETUP menu you selected before you turned off the power At this time the menu graphic appear as shown below The flashing menu indicator is the currently selected menu Turning the JOG dial will select a different menu and the corresponding menu indicator will flash Note With the factory initial settings or when you turn on the power again after you format a current drive disk Signature Set Setting a signature appears Otherwise the first hierarchy level of the previously selected SETUP menu appears To exit SETUP mode press the STOP button or the EXIT NO key Each time you press one of these keys the recorder returns to the previous hierarchy level of the menu and finally exits SET
286. sted If the RECORD button is pressed once again the D2424 will return to repro monitoring If any select key is pressed together with the SHIFT key the envelope function of that track can be executed This key is also used for editing such as copy paste move paste and erase Refer to page 28 for details about the reproduction monitor and the input monitor Refer to page 60 for details about the envelope function Refer to page 66 for details about the copy paste and move paste function 3 Track shift key TRACK SHIFT ALL INPUT When selecting a recording track this is pressed to shift to the selectable track With each pressing of the key the TRACK SHIFT LED will sequentially switch in order of Extinguish Lighting of 9 16 Lighting of 17 24 Extinguish to indicate the modes listed below ET 31 11 30 28 26 24 22 20 5 RECALL RECORD 29 27 25 23 21 All TRACK SHIFT LED extinguished Tracks 1 8 can be selected 9 16 are lighted Tracks 9 16 can be selected 17 24 are lighted Tracks 17 24 can be selected All real track input monitors can be switch on or off each press of this key while pressing SHIFT key When all tracks are set to input monitor the ALL INPUT LED will light 4 Auto Play Auto Return key AUTO RTN PLAY Pressing this key repeatedly will change Auto Play mode Auto Return mode and Repeat mode On Off as follo
287. sync and Sync modes either should be selected depending on the application If it is set to Async mode the later explained Clock Sel Setting the operating clock should be setup in accordance to the application nitial setting Analog Assignable digital signal setting digital in clock adat Async adat digital signal Asynchronous mode adat Sync adat digital signal Synchronous mode SPDIF Async S P DIF digital signal Asynchronous mode SPDIF Sync S P DIF digital signal Synchronous mode Analog not assigned digital signal This setting is shared by all Programs in the same disk The settings cannot be saved and loaded as part of the song data The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the recorder Function of the DATA INPUT connectors Setup for analog signals If the digital input is set up for Analog Initial setting digital signals cannot be input at DATA INPUT 1 8 9 16 and 17 24 of the D2424 Setup for S P DIF digital signals If the digital input is set up for S P DIF Async or Sync only DATA INPUT 1 8 can be used S P DIF digital signals input to DATA INPUT 1 8 will be assigned and recorded in tracks 1 and 2 of D2424 Setup for adat digital signals If the digital input is set up for adat Async or Sync all DATA INPUT connectors can be used Adat digital signals input to DATA INPUT 1 8 will be assigned and recorded in tracks 1 8 the signals to
288. t successfully access points after REC END though play is executed after REC END however this makes it possible to move up the ABS time Single Undo Hedo Erase You can single undo or redo the Erase operation To restore the data that existed before you erased it press the UNDO REDO key To restore the data after you undo the Erase operation press the UNDO REDO key again When you press the UNDO REDO key the recorder will undo or redo the operation immediately and display Undo or Redo and COMPLETED lt Note gt This function only works when this recorder is in the stop mode lt Note gt If you perform one of the following operations after you use the Copy amp Paste or Move and Paste operation the Undo Redo function will no longer be effective If a new recording has been made When a new editing job is executed such as Copy amp Paste Move amp Paste Erase While in the AUTO PUNCH ON mode when the AUTO PUNCH IN point is passed in the PLAY or RECORD mode If the power was switched off If program select was executed When multiple undo is executed Fostex Model D2424 Reference Manual Editing Tracks Track Exchange Track exchange is the function that exchanges tracks all real tracks and all additional tracks currently in the programs in mono track units or in multiple track Stereo pair 2 tracks 8 track units units In other words exchan
289. tal signals from external equipment are correctly input TC RDY This blinks when the recorder is entered in the TC READY mode by pressing the EDIT key while holding down the SHIFT key and will light during recording of TC Model D2424 Reference Manual Names and Functions FOSt X 3 Switching the display using the DISP SEL key Let s assume that you turned off the power while the time display was using a time base of ABS and then you turned the power on again The recorder time display will again use a time base of ABS Underline Displayed program number ABS TIME display ABS MMM uu ms UU UL LI I MMM I uu Pom UON F s TEIL oe ELLA 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 At this time if you press the DISP SEL key the Disk Remain display will appear Both recordable time and hard disk capacity remaining will be converted to mono track and expressed in time and megabytes DISK REMAIN display If BAR BEAT CLK is selected for the time base explained later the DISK REMAIN indication will show a value in terms of the number of measures calculated based on the last beat tempo data on the tempo map of the recorded song If you press the DISP SEL key again the MTC IN display will appear If an optional Model 8345 TC SYNC card is installed and the reference TC is switched to LTC and an external TC is input that reference input LTC time f
290. tatus repry This is the reply against the 22 41 lock status request 32 42 lock mode lock mode status reply This the reply against the 22 42 lock mode status request 32 45 edit message copy clip status reply This is the reply against the 12 45 copy clip command or the 22 45 copy clip status request 32 46 edit message copy paste status reply 32 46 edit message mmc time copy paste status reply This is the reply against the 12 46 copy paste command or the 22 46 copy paste status request mmc time indicates the unprocessed time until completion of copy paste editing 32 47 edit message erase status reply 32 47 edit message mmc time erase status reply This is the reply against 12 47 erase command or 22 47 erase status request 32 49 edit message gt lt count gt lt mmc track clipboard play status reply This is the reply against the 12 49 clipboard play command If there is no sound data in the clipboard 32 49 lt edit mes sage 14 void data gt will be replied mmc track indicates the sound data track number 32 4A edit message undo status reply This is the reply against the 12 4A undo command Either edit message 01 completed or edit message 14 void data will be replied 32 4B edit message redo status reply This is the reply against the 12 4B redo command Either edit message 01 completed gt or edit message 14
291. te When the Setup of digital inputs is set to sync mode of SPDIF sync or adat Sync the SETUP mode Clock Sel setting will be ignored and the digital in clock will have priority In this case DIGITAL and EXT will light up in the CLOCK section of the display 45 Notes e Do not connect or disconnect the optical cable to the DATA INPUT jack when digital input is assigned Doing so could generate noise in the D2424 and affect the external digital equipment When the digital input is set to adat Async or Sync and locked to any one among the three DATA IN PUT 1 8 9 16 17 24 DIGITAL will light in the display and the tracks not locked will automatically change to analog input By using this function analog digital 24 track simultaneous recording will be possible by applying analog signals to tracks 1 8 and adat digital signals to tracks 9 16 and 17 24 Setting recording tracks Press the RECORD TRACK select keys of the tracks selected in the digital input track menu to ready the tracks for recording Recording 1 Locate the beginning of the Program 2 Make sure that the DIGITAL indicators light up on the screen While pressing and holding down the RECORD button press the PLAY button to start recording 3 Play the external digital device Make sure that the level meter segments light up and move as the digital signal is being input Completing recording 4 After y
292. ter you turn off the power to the recorder Preroll time before the locate point can be set between 00 and 10 seconds p This point is located if the current position is before the locate point t 1 This point is actually located Locate point stored in the memory key This point is located if the current position is after the locate point Setting a preroll time 1 While the recorder is stopped press the SETUP 4 Press the EXECUTE YES key key to enter SETUP mode The display shows the value then returns to the indication that appeared in step 2 2 Turn the JOG dial to select Preroll Time 7 7 To cancel the setting operation or to restore the setting flashes then press the EXECUTE YES key obtained prior to the EXECUTE YES key press press The current preroll time setting appears on the display the STOP button or the EXIT NO key Each time Pressing the EXECUTE YES key lights up the flashing you press one of these keys the recorder returns to character steadily the current setting flashes the previous hierarchy level of the menu and finally The initial setting is 00 as shown below exits SETUP mode and displays the previous Time Base Qoe a M Fs Miluiz EN Lock as 30 mm IT 32 BT a UON rs m crock INT o 3 H 3 1 Jom wed 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 3 Turn the JOG dial to e
293. tes of record time remaining REMAIN on the current drive immediately after it is formatted and a 20 minute program is recorded in Program 1 then there is only 10 minutes of recording time remaining for any additional programs Simply put if the total record time is 30 minutes it does not matter whether the 30 minutes is taken by 1 program or shared among several programs since the total of 30 minutes for a recording remains the absolute total Note that some disk space is compensated when several programs are created on the disk A new program cannot be created when there is no recordable space remaining on the disk However programs produced by Program duplicating are exempted For initial setup when producing a new program the initial setting of the currently active program is directly copied For example if there is a randomly set tempo map in the current program that tempo map setting will be copied as the tempo map for the new program This is convenient for producing a new program with the same setting as previously made music 6 Warning messages If you perform an incorrect operation input incorrect data or if an error occurs the following alarm indication appears Invalid data indication The input data is not appropriate for the operation Action to take Input correct data 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 24 Display of void This is displayed if you attempt some so
294. tial setting ABS Permissible setup item ABS Bar Beat This item can be setup for each program The setting can be saved loaded as song data This setting will be held even though power is switched OFF Refer to page 115 SETUP mode MTC offset mode setting for operating procedure 4 Setup to the same frame rate as that setup by the sequence software by MTC Frame rate setting of the SETUP mode Initial setting 25 frames Permissible setup of frame rate 24 25 29 97nd 29 97df 30nd 30df This item can be setup for each program The setting can be saved loaded as song data This setting will be held even though power is switched OFF Refer to page 113 SETUP mode MTC Frame rate setting for operating procedure and details 5 Set to the same figure as the sequence software MMC device number and Fostex System Exclusive Message device number by the SETUP mode MIDI device ID setting When the sequence software transmits by 7F it means ALL DEVICE and therefore it need not be setup 78 Model D2424 Reference Manual MIDI Sync Function FOStex Initial setting 00 Permissible setup ID 00 99 This item will be the setting common to all programs This setting cannot be saved loaded as song data This setting will be held even though power is switched OFF Refer to page 120 SETUP mode MIDI device ID
295. time base display to BAR BEAT CLK Confirming the MIDI clock sync During recording and at playback following the recording the time base BAR BEAT CLK is displayed in accordance to the setup tempo map and the MIDI clock and song position pointer is also output Confirm that the travel position BAR BEAT CLK of the recorder and the travel position of the synchronized MIDI sequencer are matched 76 Model D2424 Reference Manual MIDI Sync Function FOStex f correct sync cannot be obtained re check the connections cables and setting of both equipment Note In the recorder the ABS O position is set at OO2BAR 1BEAT OOCLK This setting is made in consideration of the time required it will not sync immediately for the MIDI sequencer etc to enter into sync As a result if the recorder is played back from ABS O LOCATE ABS 0 sync will be completed by the time it reaches the first bar and will thus synchronize from head of the tune Execution of recording Various ways of recording can be conducted while synchronizing the recorder and the MIDI sequencer with the MIDI clock MTC sync MIDI machine control system The following will explain synchronization by the MTC MIDI time code output and the computer controlling system using MMC MIDI machine control In this system the recorder will be the master and the computer with sequence software will be the slave The recorder will attach any desired o
296. ting a program that can be saved on one backup disk The backup disk will indicate that a new program is going to be created backup disk shows BO1 Flashing S h UOM Fs E L we 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Pressing the EXECUTE YES key will start save operations and then the following indication will appear This indicates that the song data of the current drive selected is being saved on the BO1 backup disk The disk space necessary to save the data is counted down while the data is being saved 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 When the data is saved the system goes to the program time base indication prior to going to the SETUP mode then COMPLETED lights up e When selecting a Save All The display will change for selecting the program to start the save When the JOG dial is rotated 01 through the last program number can be selected 1 2345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 22 If it is executed with 01 displayed all programs will be saved If another number is selected from the selected number to the last can be saved If the EXECUTE YES key is pressed after selecting the starting program the save will start and at the instant it is finished COMPLETED will light up When selecting a program to save that requires several disks Save will immediately start if the EXECUTE YES key is presse
297. tion on the Vari pitch function Refer to pages 80 and 83 for more information on Slave mode 21 Fast Forward button F FWD Pressing this button while the recorder section is stopped will fast forward data at 30 times speed Pressing this button in Play mode will cue data you can hear sound during the fast forward operation at five times speed Pressing this button while holding down the STOP button will initiate the LOCATE ABS REC END operation and immediately locate the end of the recorded data on the Program ABS REC END Refer to the STOP button section for more information about LOCATE ABS REC END Model D2424 Reference Manual Names and Functions FOSt X 22 Locate key LOCATE Use this key to start to start the LOCATE feature Pressing this key after a memory key CLIPBOARD IN OUT AUTO RTN START END AUTO PUNCH IN OUT locates the memory data programmed in each respective key time mode or bar beat clock setting The data can be programmed by individually setting it with one of the 99 01 99 LOCATE numbers of the LOCATE key Note that the data of memory number 00 is available in addition to LOCATE numbers 01 99 The last LOCATE time setting bar beat clock setting constantly replaces the data stored in the LOCATE key as data in memory number 00 Therefore it is possible to press this key alone to repeatedly LOCATE the same point These data can be individually stored in programs P1 P9
298. to input a continuous digital signal As a counter measure the sync signal should be set to Free by the Slave mode setting menu Using this setting the recorder will enter self operation by the internal clock after completion of chase lock and it will be possible to supply a stable digital signal to the external equipment Under this setting when MTC drift between the master recorder and slave recorder exceeds 10 frames the recorder will assume that chase lock has been disengaged and the slave recorder will carry out position matching again with the master unit re chase operation During the re chase operation sound output will be muted and the digital signal will also be interrupted If it is within 10 frames the slave recorder will continue to run while admitting this drift 84 Model D2424 Reference Manual Saving and Loading Song Data FOSTEX Saving and Loading Song Data The recorder allows you to select the data audio data and Setup data from a current Program and save it to a DAT machine as an S PDIF digital signal or to an adat machine as an adat digital signal or save it to a SCSI device You can also re load the saved data to the recorder In particular using a SCSI device enables you to save and load the data of all Programs up to 99 Programs as well as an individual Program These save and load functions are convenient when you wish to store Programs complete or in progress temporarily to a
299. to travel Because the master supplies digital signal to slave in this system re chase is rarely carried out following chase lock Should the unit fail to correctly chase lock and control re check the connection cables and all settings Execution of recording ex M H A X MI A variety of recording work can be carried out with all three recorder s in the chase lock mode 82 Model D2424 Reference Manual MIDI Sync Function FOStex External MIDI equipment sync system by the slave mode Up to this point synchronization with external MIDI equipment has been explained with the recorder as the master and MIDI equipment as the slave but depending on the slave mode setting the MIDI equipment can be set as the master and the recorder as the slave Note External MIDI equipment which can be used as the master is limited to those which can output MTC nitialize the recorder Confirm the program and sampling frequency n the following the explanation will be on the assumption that a computer with sequence software is used Master Computer with MMC MTC software Slave MIDI OUT Connection to external equipment Connect MIDI OUT of the computer with MIDI interface with MIDI IN of the recorder The computer sequence software complying to M
300. ts if 24 channels are played back and in some SCSI equipment channels that can be played back could be changed The following operations cannot be executed when the drive is switched to backup drive Save load of song data Setup of rhythm Recording Creating a new program Deleting a program Copy amp paste and Move amp paste Erase Track exchange Multiple undo Setup of tempo ON OFF of metronome function Setup of permission or denial of recording If power to this recorder is switched again the drive will automatically switch to current drive E IDE In order to take out the removable disk when set to backup drive press the EXIT NO key while holding down the SHIFT key Setting of the drive 1 While the recorder is stopped press the SETUP 4 Press the EXECUTE YES key after choosing the key to enter SETUP mode setting you want 2 Turn the JOG dial to select Drive Sel To cancel the operation or to restore the setting flashes and then press the EXECUTE YES key obtained prior to the EXECUTE YES key press press The current setting will start flashing which indicates it the STOP button or the EXIT NO key Each time is ready to change setting pa you press one of these keys the recorder returns to In the case of initial setting it will show IDE1 the previous hierarchy level of the menu and finally exits SETUP mode and displays the previous Time
301. tted disk 1 The SETUP mode is entered by pressing the SETUP key 2 Select Save PGM blinks with the JOG dial and press the EXECUTE YES key The currently setup content will flash in the display i UOM rs D D as CLOCK INT 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 3 Select the flashing SCSI6 with the JOG dial and press the EXECUTE YES key Select IDE2 when saving in the E IDE hard disk or optional DVD RAM disk After displaying drive name the display will change to Bkup Mode for selecting the backup mode WAVE will flashes Flashing 12345 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 4 Select the backup mode WAVE with the JOG dial and press the EXECUTE YES key The display will change to CB Export OFF OFF flashes and ON OFF of the clip board export can be setup Flashing T a vu Es CLOCK INT i Normally when saving ABS O REC END data proceed to the next step while the setup is OFF But under the following condition save is executed with the setup ON 1 23 45 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 lt Please remember gt When clip board export is set to ON save is to be executed only on data within a desired range In such a case the desired range must be registered by the CLIPBOARD IN and CLIPBOARD OUT points previous to executing save For explanation on registering of CLIPBOA
302. tting will also be automatically erased is on the time signature value To cancel the setting operation or to exit SETUP mode 3 Use the JOG dial to enter a new value f Entering J gt TAR the existing data Note that you after storing data press the STOP button or the EXIT cannot enter gt for measure O01 NO key Each time you press one of these keys the recorder returns to the previous hierarchy level of the 4 Press the EXECUTE YES key menu and finally exits SETUP mode 5 Press the EXIT NO key or STOP button Clearing all time signature and tempo settings 3 Press the EXECUTE YES key lt Caution gt Th d d ditta Using this function will erase not only the time signature N E ande ue i P us mpo aata s P aime setting but also the tempo data specified in the Setting SUPE nU Vx ME EC tM a tempo menu described in the next section 4 Press the EXIT NO key or STOP button 1 Repeat steps 1 3 described in the Storing a time To cancel the All Clear operation press the STOP signature section button or the EXIT NO key now Each time you press one of these keys the recorder returns to the previous hierarchy level of the menu and finally exits SETUP 2 While the measure number is flashing turn the mode JOG dial counter clockwise to select All Clear When All Clear appears SURE flashes and you can clear the time signature and tempo data in the n
303. unction on to use the Multiple Undo function for all takes recordings and edits This function consumes more disk space If you are using a small capacity disk turn this Multiple Undo function off Function Turn this function off to use the undo redo function only for the current take recording or edit If the capacity of the current drive disk is small turn this function off The recorder formats a disk while evaluating the integrity of the disk including the access time Standard Format for each block on the disk Time required for formatting is longer but you can be sure of a Default Setting highly reliable format Ordinarily this format type is selected This option is displayed and accessible whether you format a new disk or reformat an old disk With this simple format type the recorder assumes that all sectors on the hard disk are of good quality Time required for formatting is shorter but any bad sectors would not be detected Quick Format Select this format type when you format a brand new disk for which Fostex has confirmed quality operation You can select this format type only when you format a new disk or reformat a disk previously formatted with Quick Format Format Type You can select this format type only when you reformat a disk previously formatted with Standard Erase Format Format Use of this format will erase all data on the disk while keeping the Standard Format Time required for formatting i
304. ver this does not mean that the entire recording duration is 12 minutes The disk space actually used for recording is five minutes 3 minutes 2 minutes That is the area between three minutes and ten minutes that corresponds to 25 minutes of recording space in terms of ABS time is still unrecorded When you try to play or fast forward this unrecorded area the time counter on the display will count but the recorder will not access the disk However MTC will be output when you try to play this area On the recorder the top of the disk is called ABS 0 and the recording end point is called REC END 25 REMAIN indicator The REMAIN indicator displays available recording time expressed in time value ABS or MTC or bar beat clock BAR BEAT CLK value depending on the currently selected Time Base It also indicates the available disk space Right after you format the disk the REMAIN indicator will show the maximum recordable time and space on the disk The following example shows that the disk had about 3 hours recordable space after the disk format operation and has recorded data of 2 hours 48 minutes 57 seconds The REMAIN indicator displays the amount of unrecorded area recorded area 11min 03sec unrecorded area 2 hour 48 min 57 sec recordable disk area 3 hours lt Display example gt 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 28 24 The REMA
305. w To cancel the operation or to restore the setting obtained prior to the EXECUTE YES key press press vao om the STOP button or the EXIT NO key Each time HB you press one of these keys the recorder returns to i y the previous hierarchy level of the menu and finally exits SETUP mode and displays the previous Time Base Flashing lt Note gt There are no 29 97nd or 29 97df in the MTC standard Use either 30nd or 30df unless you definitely need to synchronize the recorder with NTSC video eaecl 38 24 E 2 12 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Setting an MTC offset value MTC Offset menu The Setting an MTC offset value menu enables you to specify an offset time value the difference between the time of MTC output from the recorder and the ABS 00m OOs OOf OOsf time You need to specify this value if you have selected MTC for the Setting MIDI sync output signal menu With the initial setting of 00h 59m 57s OOf OOsf for example MTC of 59m 57s OOf OOsf is output at the ABS time 00m 00s OOf OOsf You can also set an offset value from the OOlbar 1beat OOclk value bar beat on the Tempo Map Refer to the next section for information on MTC Offset mode Initial setting OOh 59m 57s OOf OOsf e Setting range of offset time 00h 00m 00s OOf OOsf 23h 59m 59s 29f 99sf You can set the value for each Program individually The setting
306. w program is made the same initial setup of the currently active program will be copied as the initial setting for the new program If you wish to make a new program under the same settings as those of a previous program call up the desired program to be copied before making the new program e A new compilation is possible only when the Chain Play MD Setup of the chain play mode menu in the SETUP mode is set to Off If the PGM SEL key is pressed when the Chain Play MD menu is set in other than the Off mode the D2424 will enter the Chain play mode Before starting compilation check that the Chain Play MD is Off and if it is not be sure to reset it to Off 1 Turn on the power to the recorder Upon starting up the recorder Initialize gt Current IDE Drv gt Hard disk model number gt Storage mode Standard format in this case messages are followed with an ABS time base then show the top of the Program ABS 0 At this time the current Program is indicated as P01 2 Press the PGM key Select PGM appears on the display briefly then changes to a flashing 01 and SURE flash is the name of PGM 01 gt ra E UOM Fs d CIEN i mox MEETS 2 12 3456 7 B 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Flashing i 1BBLSHeovcd L 5 18 24 30 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 3 Turn the
307. will show Clock Sel D in indicating that the clock is set to Digital In and Video Void w o WORD IN the recorder ignores your operation Video is displayed and you cannot se When receiving word clock from When receiving word clock from lectit See the ap i WORD IN the recorder automati WORD IN the recorder synchro pendix of the Refer clock received Regardless of receiving or not re cally synchronizes to the incom nizes to the incoming clock while ence manual for de from WORD IN ceiving word clock from WORD ing clock while the DIGITAL and the DIGITAL and EXT indicators tails IN the recorder is referenced to EXT indicators light in the dis light in the display adat Async the internal clock When the re play corder receives correct digital sig no clock nals the DIGITAL indicator lights When no word clock is received When no word clock is received the received from in the display the recorder is referenced to the EXT indicator flashes showing that WORD IN internal clock while the EXT in the recorder cannot be locked dicator flashes clock received Regardless of receiving or not receiving word clock from WORD IN the recorder synchronizes to the from WORD IN external adat digital signals When the recorder receives correct digital signals the DIGITAL and adat Sync no clock EXT indicators light in the display When Digital In is set to a SYNC mode if you try to select C
308. wish to redo the recording repeat the recording after executing undo by using the single undo redo 8 Play the musical instrument in time with the or multiple undo functions metronome and adjust the recording level of the track to be recorded on the mixer 49 Fostex Model D2424 Reference Manual Storing a Locate Point Edit Point Storing a Locate Point Edit Point You can store specific individual time data time bar beat clock in each memory key The time data stored is used as an Editing Point to execute Locate Point or Auto Punch In Out Copy amp Paste Move amp Paste or Erase You can also store 99 Locate Number 01 99 time data in the LOCATE key in addition to the Memory key to enable locate only features This chapter will describe how to store specific data in the memory key and how to edit and re store data is already stored in the memory key The data stored in each memory are used for the following operations Also the 99 locate memories can be used for the Mark STOP memory For details refer to Setup of stop function at the mark point in the SETUP mode Memory key When you set the IN OUT points for Auto Punch In Out IN OUT points for Copy amp Clip Move amp Clip and START END points for Auto Return Auto Repeat END points AUTO RTN CLIPBOARD AUTO PUNCH IN OUT START OUT END o0 000 O a PREVIEW D Locating the AUTO PUNCH IN point R
309. ws O LED off 6 LED light up AUTO RTN Auto Return Auto Play mode is OFF No indication AUTO PLAY AUTO RTN Auto Play mode is ON Only the AUTO PLAY LED is lit AUTO PLAY AUTO RTN Auto Return mode is ON Only the AUTO RTN LED is lit AUTO PLAY AUTO RTN e GUTO PUR Auto Repeat mode is ON Both AUTO PLAY and AUT RTN LEDs are lit Auto Play mode In this mode playback will start automatically after the START point is located This function is effective at any locate points other than the REC END point Auto Return mode When the END point is reached during playback the START point is automatically located in this mode This function is effective only when the START and END points have been specified Note The Auto Return function is works only during playback In the recording mode the START point will not be located automatically when the END point is reached FOStex Model D2424 Reference Manual Names and Functions Auto Repeat mode This mode is a combination of Auto Play and Auto Return and plays back the part between the START and END points repeatedly The auto repeat function is effective only when the START and END points have been specified correctly Refer to page 54 for details 5 Clipboard In key CLIPBOARD IN PREVIEW This key is used to store and recall the In point CLIPBO
310. xecutinpg Of recording ecested cierre tense Fer eere cba caet Pese repre aa aa aera debo Fee Tees eie eee EiS 84 Saving and Loading Song Data Aboutsaved and loaded data eret ete eh nter edem cte o ec ee eed 85 Saving the data using a adat or S P DIF digital signal sese 87 Connecting an external device ies aai ee erat lacer er eei URDU Fee rio Pe ee a ca see rep eee duce sataneis ted 87 Setting p an external device eie esci tiet eter ro evi eere ei odes tai ree eodeni te durer pe ttv aec ri Pr se tee ee eU ZU 87 Executinp the save OperatlOD 2 eine eever ka rew eere eo s eUpn one r eS DEPO EIN HEP R HERB IUS NR aae EE eaS PEERS FER EEEa REKER 87 Loading the data using a adat or S P DIF digital signal esssssseeeeseeeenneennnnen nnne 89 Connecting the external device iie ertet preti t aidea soana uai eye kart YU kev aeter ea ie eruta Reap eges 89 Setting up am external device ss estiss aretini denies eene er pee Dep aaea den taeret eet ev et vat arenae E brace eden vun 89 Executing the load operation eene ee erret reete ere pets ene EE eee be EE LESENE ENEE ELEELE 89 Saving he detaiusing SCS a rice ertet diari e rede er d n e ER eee dee eras aban 91 Connecting a SCSIOeVICe sese catvise te ipei entere eta ede e boe tub eere Eu EN ae VENE ERR UR ERE Ee eere Ue CR Ea A Pea Peu en 91 Format nea SCSI GIS Kis euis reiecit EAE TAE N duse A cr HR A IS 92 Saving data of an individual progra
311. xits SETUP mode and displays the previous Time Base BIT 24 UDOM Fs DLL hos Lock INT 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 Ll Fostex Model D2424 Reference Manual Changing the Initial Settings SETUP mode Setting the Slave type Slave Type menu The Setting the Slave type menu enables you to setup how recorder should function after chase lock when recorder is set to sync externally in slave mode ON by the previously mentioned Setting the slave mode nitial setting Vari e Option Vari Free Vari The recorder synchronizes only to external MTC Free The recorder locks to MTC then synchronizes to the internal clock You can set the parameter for each Program individually The settings can be saved and loaded as part of the song data The settings are maintained after you turn off the power to the recorder The Program is automatically checked before the operation The sampling rate is automatically checked before the operation Setting the Slave type 1 While the recorder is stopped press the SETUP Notes key to enter SETUP mode e You need to input MTC from an external device to the recorder with any Slave type 2 Turn the JOG dial to select Slave Type flashes then press the EXECUTE YES key The current Slave type appears on the display Pressing the EXECUTE YES key turns off the flashing character and
312. y a specific range of data from a specific Between tracks 1 56 exchanging is possible in mono track and paste it to the same or a different track track units or group track units Stereo pair 2 tracks Copy amp Paste is possible in the presently active program or 8 tracks or also in a different program Move amp Paste Editing the track name You can move a specific range of data from a specific track and paste it to the same or a different track Move amp Paste You can erase a specific range of data from a specific track or all tracks Any type of track name can be registered and edited for each channel Note Although Copy amp Paste can be executed in a different program all other editing work can only be done within the currently active program Consequently in order to edit the active program the desired program should be selected before starting to edit In general don t change a program until you finish editing except to Copy amp Paste to a different program If editing is started while in another program you could accidentally lose data Copy amp Paste Move amp Paste and Erase with the exception of track exchange and editing the track name is possible only for data recorded on the real track If data stored in the additional track is to be edited move it temporarily to a real track and then edit it Copy amp Paste and Move amp Paste Copy amp Paste and Move amp Paste

Fostex D2424 DVR User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents